Home

Pioneer SC-35 TV Receiver User Manual

Contents

1. 3 cm 1 inch Other remote control This receiver s remote control 4 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending teaching the signal to this receiver s remote control If the LED lights for one second the setting has been successfully completed 5 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 3 and 4 To program signals for another component exit and repeat steps 2 through 4 6 Press R SETUP to exit the programming mode Erasing one of the remote control button settings This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default 1 Press and hold R SETUP then press 7 for three seconds The LED flashes continuously e To cancel the preset setup mode press R SETUP 2 Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased then press ENTER The LED flashes once 3 Press and hold the button to be erased for three seconds If the LED lights for one second the erasing has been successfully completed 4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons 5 Press R SETUP to exit the erasing mode Note Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function This operation erases all the operational settings of other devices that have been programmed in one input functio
2. SIRIUS COAL L ASSIGNABLE a NA INK cD CD R i AEN IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX TION FRIMPEDANCE 69 160 CU RF100 NTION TE DIMPEDANCE DE 69 169 paame The surround back terminals can also be used for ZONE 2 5 1 ch surround setting Not connected Not connected 6 1 ch surround setting Not connected Surround back 7 1 ch surround setting Surround back right Surround back left ZONE 2 setting ZONE 2 Right ZONE 2 Left 03 Connecting your equipment Bi amping your speakers Front right Front left Bi amp compatible speaker Bi amp compatible speaker Center Subwoofer OUT 1 ouT2 N N N A CONTROL il A g T ep Gz Ga Gz Ge COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE SIRIU COAXIAL Assicn aye 1000 ele ZONE2 ZONE3 DVD TV SAT VIDEO DVR BDR PHONO cD IN IN IN U IN ou OPTICAL f IGNABLE OUT OUT OUT O O O O OOO 0 SUBWOOFER MULTI CH IN R SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SEE INSTRUCTION NUAL OUTPUT VOIR LE MODE OUTPUT 5V 150 mA MAX CU RF100 CAUTION SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 69 169 Surround right Surround left Bi amping is w
3. Sm OPTICAL ASSIGNAI 4 avn z Go MONTOR Rejo 00e D VIDEO peers PHONO co IN n ae Sones Scare PRE OUT I ES SIGNAL ANTENNA U Pa ped Ws LA bee SE 57 SARs y ZA x N SPEAKERS Class 2Wiring SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL OUTPUT 5 V aa PORTE HOE 150 mA MAX TOTAL M2 2 CL ne CAUTION SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 69 169 CU RF100 ATTENTION ENCEINTE D IMPEDANCE DE 62 160 e f you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver connect the receiver and TV with audio cables page 99 e lf you use an optical digital audio cable you ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you connected the player to see The nout Setup menu on page 45 Note 1 When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections if the TV supports the HDMI Audio Return Channel function the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI terminal so there is no need to connect an audio cable In this case set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI see HDM Setup on page 73 En Connecting your equipment Connecting your TV with no HDMI input This diagram shows connections of a TV with no HDMI input and DVD player or other playback component to the receiver e With these connections the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with an HDMI cab
4. communications function on page 91 e Depending on the communications environment two way communications may not work well and the remote control display may not reflect the receiver s status gt Controls and displays En WAND Gray box with black letters Two way communications are established and the receiver s power is off ETT White letters only Two way communications are not working well In this case the area indicating the receiver s status 12 is not displayed 2 Remote control code sending indicator This appears when signals are sent from the remote control 3 Remote control code sending mode indicator This indicates whether remote control codes are being sent by infrared IR signal or RF communications 4 Remote control operation indicator This indicates which operation mode the remote control is currently set to The display indicates the setting of the remote control operation selector switch 5 Input function and sending code indicator This indicates what input function can currently be operated with the remote control Also when a button is pressed and its operation code is sent the name of that code is displayed 6 Area indicating the remote control s status 7 Nothing displayed Nothing is displayed here when the remote control code sending mode is set to IR 8 Scroll indicators Light when there are more selectable items when making the various settings 9 Receiver input indicator
5. to select the proper code from the list then try using this remote with your component The code should start with the component type for example DVD 020 If there is more than one start with the first one To try out the remote control switch the component on or off into standby by pressing SOURCE If it doesn t seem to work select the next code from the list if there is one 1 You can t assign TUNER HMG NET RADIIO ADAPTER and iPod USB Preset codes can be assigned to the OPTION 1 and OPTION 2 buttons Note however that Sirius is pre assigned to OPTION 1 XM to OPTION 2 and if other preset codes are assigned Sirius and XM operations can no longer be performed If you accidentally assign other codes to one of these buttons it is possible to reset that button only see Resetting the input assignment of one of the input function buttons on page 86 2 When using a Pioneer HDD recorder please select PIONEER DVR 450 451 or 452 e When using a Pioneer flat panel TV released prior to summer 2005 please select preset code 644 Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 CH e f you can t find or properly enter a preset code you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control see Programming signals from other remote controls below 7 If your component is controlled successfully press ENTER to confirm The remote display shows OK Programming signals
6. Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source or bypasses them completely Adjusts the amount of bass Adjusts the amount of treble With the Sound Retriever function DSP processing is used to compensate for the loss of audio data upon compression improving the sound s sense of density and modulation May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source for example video tape with lots of background noise when switched on Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack By moving from UP1 through UP2 and UP3 up to UP4 you can make the sound source seem to relocate upwards Creates a wider dynamic range with SC 37 only digital sources like CDs DVDs or Hi bit32 High Sampling Hi bit BDs Smoother more delicate musical expression can be achieved by requantizing 16 bit PCM or 20 bit compressed audio signals or 24 bit compressed lossless audio signals to 32 bit Creates a wider dynamic range with SC 35 only digital sources like CDs or DVDs High Bit High Sampling Smoother more delicate musical expression can be achieved by requantizing 16 bit PCM or 20 bit compressed audio signals to 24 bit Option s 0 0 to 10 0 frames 1 second 30 frames NTSC Default 0 0 MIDNIGHT LOUDNESS OFF ao MIDNIGHT ON LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble LOUDNESS ON BYPASS ON
7. Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer Audio Section Input Sensitivity Impedance PHONO MM oaia starsat ocak aire eke wan de de 5 mV 47 KQ LT hea E ody dea Groen ashes 4 ey eye ae 400 mV 47 KQ Output Level Impedance PE sana foes an ee we yee i ae 400 mV 2 2 KQ Signal to Noise Ratio IHF short circuited A network PINE e ates oo ed aya ae el aes Eee en ge 103 dB Frequency Response 5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB Pure Direct Mode Tuner Section Frequency Range FM 87 5 MHz to 108 MHz Antenna Input FM lt asece aw ace diva aes 75 Q unbalanced Frequency Range AM jes sasas ernawa 531 kHz to 1602 kHz Antenna AM 0 cece een Loop antenna balanced Video Section Signal level COMPOSITG VIdGO arere raki rA 1 Vp p 75 Q Component Video saua uaaa Y 1 0 Vp p 75 Q PB PR 0 7 Vp p 75 Q Corresponding maximum resolution Component Video ee 1080p 1125p Video convert off Digital In Out Section HDMI terminal ouaaa aa beedaw ans 19 pin Not DVI FAV OUMOUT TY 06 gt dob ain asp avy doe sae eae aa a 5 V 100 mA JSB temina areri rerenew USB2 0 Full Speed Type A iPod terminal 0 000 USB and Video Composite SIRIWS niente Cale sdadaawareeeunad 8 pin mini DIN cable ADAPTER PORT terminal 0000 5 V 100 mA Integrated Control Section Control SR terminal 0 3 5 Mini jack MONO Control IR terminal 00 3 5 Mini jack MONO LR SIGNS
8. SC 37 only When connected in this way you can play audio files stored on the components on the network including your computer using HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs OUT 1 CONTROL IND NA DVD cD MONITOR OUT n DVR BDR PHONO cD CD R TAPE IN IN IN 1 OlOl 00 SIGNAL GND FRONT HEIGHTWIDE EJ R L SURROUND BACK L Singh ABLE TRUCTION TABLE MODE dl LAN cable sold separately to LAN port Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN terminal on your router with or without the built in DHCP server function with a straight LAN cable CAT 5 or higher Turn on the DHCP server function of your router In case your router does not have the built in DHCP server function it is necessary to set up the network manually For details see Network Setup menu on page 117 LAN terminal specifications LANTET state cuore A eet ek Ethernet jack 1OBASE 1T 100BASE TX 1 COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT can be used to output clear images e The GUI screen is not displayed if only the COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is connected e The video convert function does not work for ZONE 2 Connect the composite video and component video to the same types of jacks for the inputs and outputs 2 To listen to Internet radio stations you must sign a contract with an ISP Internet Service Provider beforehand 3 Photo or video files cannot be played back e Wi
9. 1 Press and hold R SETUP then press 3 for three seconds The LED flashes continuously e To cancel the preset setup mode press R SETUP 2 Press the input function button or SOURCE button For Multi operations press the input function you wish to program for example if you want to start the sequence by switching on your DVD player press DVD For System off press the SOURCE button The LED blinks twice and flashes continuously 3 If necessary press the input function button for the component whose command you want to input This is only necessary if the command is for a new component input function 4 Select the button for the command you want to input The LED blinks once and flashes continuously e You don t need to program the receiver to switch on or off This is done automatically With Pioneer components you don t need to program the power to switch off in a shutdown sequence except DVD recorders 5 Repeat steps 3 to 4 to program a sequence of up to five commands If you press R SETUP before programming is completed commands programmed up to that point will be stored 6 Press R SETUP to exit the programming mode Using multi operations 1 Press MULTI OPERATION The LED flashes continuously 2 Within five seconds press an input function button that has been set up with a multi operation The receiver switches on if it was in standby and the programmed multi operation is per
10. Listening to Internet radio stations Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service transmitted via the Internet There are a large number of Internet radio stations broadcasting a variety of services from every corner of the world Some are hosted managed and broadcast by private individuals while others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial radio stations or radio networks Whereas terrestrial or OTA over the air radio stations are geographically restricted on the range of radio waves broadcast from a transmitter through the air Internet radio stations are accessible from anywhere in the world as long as there is aconnection to the Internet as services are not transmitted through the air but are delivered over the World Wide Web On this receiver you can select Internet radio stations by genre as well as by region Depending on the Internet line conditions the sound may not be smooth when playing Internet radio About list of Internet radio The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver is created edited and managed by the vIuner database service exclusively for use with this receiver For details about vluner see v uner on page 71 Saving and retrieving Internet radio stations You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet radio stations See Advanced operations for Internet radio on page 67 for more on this Registering broadcast stations not on the vTuner list from the special Pioneer site Wi
11. 1 To listen to Internet radio stations you must sign a contract with an ISP Internet Service Provider beforehand e Photo or video files cannot be played back e With Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 you can even play back copyrighted audio files on this receiver 2 Besides a PC you can also play back audio files stored on your other components with the built in media server function based on DLNA 1 0 or DLNA 1 5 framework and protocols i e network capable hard disks and audio systems 3 Depending on the external controller being used playback may be interrupted when the volume is adjusted from the controller In this case adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs SC 37 only Cm the PC The authorization or permission method for access varies depending on the type of server currently being connected For more information on authorizing this receiver refer to the instruction manual of your server Playback with Home Media Gallery Q Important e When you play back audio files Connecting is displayed before playback starts The display may continue for several seconds depending on the type of file In case a domain is configured in a Windows network environment you cannot access a PC on the network while you are logged onto the domain Instead of logging onto the domain log onto the local machine e here are cases where the
12. 48 Plavmga USB OEV sees is aceoataen aves nee 49 Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory OE IC Cie auc te fee Sea erate te Buse be he ee ee 49 Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory CeCe nay awed aeens bee aeeatenananaas 50 About playable Tile formats ss ees cwas wee bed ee 51 ISTO Ang TO UNG CIO ware at ae wae asked aw i 52 HM OVOVING FA SOUNO aa sok ora aardtani are tate a 52 USING Ine NOISE CUT NOG is a eaue ey aee ba ar ai 52 Using Neural SUN OU Gas 24 44 si0nt ane 25 4 6aaee 52 TURING GIPECUV 10 sta tte eed lt as eesee aaa 52 Saving staton DIESClS 225 4 aa Pee eee oe aes 52 Listening to station PreSetS 2 eee ee ee eee 52 Raming sation Pese r aadacme hee ee ae ares sd 53 Listening to Satellite Radio En RSS ei giI AO MCR A ccs TOE mare Srey are are pene 53 LIS IIA Vitlci oth FOUN Cisse ua a axe heh ace 54 SanL AANE OTESClS a1 4 ea aut aici e eee ea 54 HSn WoA MM erat e rene ee eae er me reer er ena 54 ISTE TMG TOS TRI SIR ACO reek 2 2 eit Scat alae eek id oe 54 Saving Channel OrESEIS os 4 4 coer teudie eae enue 55 Uone SIR IWS MVEN eaaa a ace 55 Listening to Internet radio stations E OMI E E E er EE EE 56 Programming the Internet radio stationS 56 Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of VU Ges aed ate aa eh te a pute Aarau ate ae tarde aes eran ae 57 Wireless MUSIC DIA aS Sxi a ate Bartek Beam iE a Fare 57 Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology
13. Published by Pioneer Corporation Copyright 2010 Pioneer Corporation All rights reserved lt ARB7446 A gt Printed in
14. Y signal Default 0 CNR Reduces noise in the input s color Oto 8 C signal Default 0 BNR Reduces block noise block Oto 8 shaped distortion generated upon Default 0 MPEG compression in the picture MNRC Reduces mosquito noise Oto 8 distortion generated at the Default 0 contours of the picture upon MPEG compression in the picture DETAIL Adjusts how sharp edges appear Oto 8 Default 0 Using other functions CH Setting What it does Option s BRIGHT Adjusts the overall brightness 6 to 6 Brightness Default 0 CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast between light 6 to 6 and dark Default 0 HUES Adjusts the red green balance 6 to 6 Default 0 CHROMA Adjusts saturation from dull to 6 to 6 Chroma bright Default 0 Level BLK SETUP Corrects the black depth in the 7 5 brightness signal a QO Normally select 7 5 If the dark parts of the picture are all black with this setting select 0 a lf the video picture deteriorates when this settings is switched ON switch it OFF b e When set to a resolution with which the TV monitor is not compatible no picture is output Also in Some cases no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals In this case change the setting e When AUTO is selected the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV monitor connected by HDMI When PURE is selected the signals are output with the same resolution
15. 0 0 dB M1 to M6 filters SWceh Wide Trim 0 0 dB All channels bands 0 0 dB EQ Wide Trim 0 0 dB EQ Data M1 to M6 Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 CH Chapter 10 Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 Q Important e This section includes explanations for the SC 37 s remote control For instructions for the SC 35 s remote control see Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 35 on page 96 About the Remote Setup menu The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the HOME MENU button while pressing MULTI OPERATION The different items on the Remote Setup menu are described below For their setting procedures refer to the explanations for the respective items Setting PRESET RECALL CODE What it does Preset codes can be set for the various input functions The remote control codes of a number of other devices including products of other brands are preset in the remote control to allow these devices to be operated See Selecting preset codes directly on page 84 If the desired operations cannot be performed LEARNING even though you have set the preset codes the MULTI OPERATE SYSTEM OFF DIRECT FUNC RENAME remote control signals of other devices can be learned directly See Programming signals from other remote controls on page 85 A series of the remote control operations for starting listening or viewing can be programmed
16. 0006 0012 0100 Carnivale 0100 Carver 0101 CCE 0110 Celebrity 0002 Celera 0106 Changhong 0106 Citizen 0004 0006 0008 0100 Clarion 0104 Coby 0056 Colortyme 0004 0006 Concerto 0004 0006 Contec 0104 Contec Cony 0007 0008 Craig 0008 0104 Crosley 0081 0101 Crown 0008 0104 CTX 0063 Curtis Mathes 0000 0004 0006 0014 0100 0101 CXC 0008 0104 Cytron 0093 Daewoo 0004 0005 0006 0023 Daytron 0004 0006 Dell 0073 DiamondVision 0096 Dimensia 0000 Disney 0046 Dumont 0004 0011 0099 Durabrand 0041 0103 0104 Dwin 0014 Electroband 0002 Electrograph 0107 Electrohome 0002 0003 0004 0006 Element 0082 Emerson 0004 0006 0007 0008 0009 0023 0103 0104 Emprex 0092 Envision 0004 0006 0100 Epson 0061 ESA 0103 Fujitsu 0009 Funai 0008 0009 0103 0104 Futuretech 0008 0104 Gateway 0067 0107 0108 GE 0000 0008 0004 0006 0010 0016 0039 GFM 0080 0084 Gibralter 0004 0011 0099 0100 Goldstar 0004 0005 0006 0007 0100 Gradiente 0066 Grunpy 0008 0009 0104 Haier 0112 Hallmark 0004 0006 Harman Kardon 0101 Harvard 0008 0104 Havermy 0014 Hewlett Packard 0053 Hisense 0069 Hitachi 0004 0006 0007 Hyundai 0098 Ilo 0089 0091 IMA 0008 Infinity 0101 InFocus 0074 Initial 0091 Insignia 0085 0086 Integ 0099 Janeil 0012 JBL 0101 JC Penney 0000 0004 0005 0006 0010 JCB 0002 Jensen 0004 0006 JVC 0007 0010 0044 5064 Kawasho
17. IP AO OhESS P OXY oeU N a wiatay Sam ened 118 CHECKING ANE MAC ACESS a a A 118 NGIWOIK OOD sas Glad crab bo ere eae a 118 FARE ORME PS ELUD MeN eroi Ute bank oi aalioats 119 VOUES silt pea areca RET eer er a a a a 119 Remote Conto Mode Seu Oia miia a eens 119 BiUCKer REGUCTION OClUD erasan aaa Ni 120 RF Remote Setup SC 397 Only sanassa snnnnn 120 EXTENSION SEPS C SO sra aa a 120 Mile Cran pel UL eW iaaa Raa 120 13 Additional information PEAKE SST SUC ata a a ee alse wate aera eve 121 Positional relationship between speakers and MIOMIDONS S t cole nc Re ccs on ae aed Bert ee 122 INGE BICS HOOUING tac aaa E E E EE 122 FON erara aroes catalan Ave ectar gh mand aA apmtave de sane 122 NGS OUCH lt tcecce salen ane arate eagca salen aera Sretecarecnd 123 Omer raddio nople 2 ace acta te dace bao acetate 124 ADAFIER POR a eenaene nd aon atte aunn aes 125 MVOC cae ah oS ae a sitet sce we aaa cle Sa eeu A 125 OC UMC oida aa a Suet BE east oe ee cage Ae aoe 126 Professional Calibration EQ graphical output 127 Bye ch eee eee eee ee oe ae eee ee ee ee ae a ee 127 REMO COMMONS Gee ee eS ee eke ead 128 WER COMO eare ea ae pence aati em oa Hence 128 PROV iaaa ayes Wu dane Avene cave tartans deta 129 Important information regarding the HDMI COMME CHIOM oan thee dee A a ee ae 130 USEE ne inet dtd Slace e Sisn Scares ed eater Bit 130 Herned C280 O01 inj care amp apantra 5 Se ace eae 0 131 IMYA mes Sag ina a4 aes man dn Bear
18. Multiple remote control codes can be set for the different input functions See Multi Operation and System Off on page 87 This is a function for automatically turning off the power of devices connected to the receiver Multiple remote control codes can be set as desired See Multi Operation and System Off on page 87 This is a setting for changing only the remote control unit s operation screen without changing the receiver s input when the remote control unit s input function buttons are pressed This is convenient for using the remote control unit for devices not connected to the receiver See Direct function on page 86 The names of the input function buttons displayed on the remote control unit can be changed as desired See Renaming input function names manually on page 86 Setting SYNC What it does Input function names changed on the receiver can RENAMING be acquired by the remote control unit so that the ERASE names are the same on the remote control unit See Renaming input function names in synchrony with the receiver on page 93 This function is used to erase remote control LEARNING codes that have been learned Codes learned for IR RF SELECT the different input functions can be erased individually See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 85 This function is for selecting wireless RF or infrared IR as the remote control operating mode
19. Press to select a Home THX listening mode page 60 PQLS Press to select the PQLS setting page 75 AUTO ALC DIRECT Switches between Auto Surround page 59 Auto Level Control Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct mode page 62 STEREO Switches between stereo playback and Front Stage Surround Advance modes page 61 STANDARD Press for Standard decoding and to switch various modes OO Pro Logic Neo 6 etc page 59 ADV SURR Use to switch between the various surround modes page 61 SIGNAL SEL Use to select an input signal page 62 SLEEP Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and select the amount of time before sleep page 81 DIMMER Dims or brightens the display page 81 A ATT Attenuates lowers the level of an analog input signal to prevent distortion page 80 SBch With this receiver SBch cannot be used MCACC Press to switch between MCACC presets page 62 HDMI OUT Switch the HDMI output terminal page 81 11 LIGHT Press to turn on off the illumination for the buttons 12 Remote control operation selector switch Set to RECEIVER to operate the receiver TV or SOURCE to operate the TV or the source device When this switch is set to RECEIVER the receiver can be controlled used to select the white commands Also use this switch to set up Surround sound Note 13 VOL Use to set the listening volume 14 MUTE Mutes the sound or restores the sound
20. Quasar 1004 Radio Shack 1003 Radio Shack Realistic 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 Radix 1003 Randex 1003 RCA 1002 1004 1007 1016 1020 1022 1030 1031 Realistic 1001 1002 1008 1004 1005 ReplayTV 1026 Ricavision 1017 Runco 1018 Samsung 1002 1016 1022 1024 Mcintosh 6032 Mitsubishi 6038 Motorola 6032 6042 NEC 6050 6131 Netsat 6059 Next Level 6032 nfusion 6015 Nokia 6025 6026 6118 6119 6121 Pace 6035 6005 6030 6031 Panarex 6016 Panasonic 6008 6009 6030 6136 6137 6138 Pansat 6016 6022 Philips 6002 6113 6038 6054 6060 6059 6102 6103 6030 6114 Primestar 6032 6147 Proscan 6110 6111 Proton 6020 RadioShack 6002 6111 6032 Radix 6036 RCA 6002 6110 6111 6113 6109 6061 6114 6142 6144 6148 SA 6124 6126 6158 6159 Saba 6014 Sagem 6041 6120 Samsung 6070 6113 6091 6048 6017 6114 6093 Sanyo 6046 Sat Cruiser 6015 Schwaiger 6066 Sanky 1018 Sansui 1014 1019 Sanyo 1001 1002 Sears 1001 1003 1004 Sharp 1012 Shogun 1002 Singer 1004 Sonic Blue 1026 Sony 1006 1009 1017 1021 Stack 1017 STS 1004 Sylvania 1004 1005 Symphonic 1005 Systemax 1017 Tagar Systems 1017 Tandy 1001 Tashiko 1003 Teac 1005 Technics 1004 Teknika 1003 1004 1005 Tivo 1016 1020 1021 1022 1025 TMK 1002 Toshiba 1015 1017 1028 Totevision 1002 1003 Touch 1017 UltimateTV 1031 Unitech 1002 Vector Research 1000 Video Concepts 1000 Videosonic
21. Setting the backlight mode on page 99 Setting What it does Reset This is a function for resetting preset codes that function have been set Key resetting can be done for individual input functions See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 98 All reset This is a function for resetting all remote control unit settings you have made to the defaults set upon shipment trom the factory See Resetting the remote control settings on page 101 Change RC If you have multiple Pioneer receivers amplifiers mode etc this setting can be used to prevent other units from operating simultaneously when the remote control unit is operated See Operating multiple receivers on page 96 Note e You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing R SETUP e After one minute of inactivity the remote automatically exits the operation Operating multiple receivers Up to four receivers can be operated discretely using this receiver s remote control when using multiple receivers provided they are of the same model as this receiver The receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the preset code to set the remote control setting e Set the remote modes on the receivers before using this function see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 119 1 Press and hold R SETUP then press 4 for three seconds The LED flashes continuously e To cancel the preset setup mode press R SETUP 2 P
22. This channel called Surround Back places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left front center front right surround right surround left and subwoofer channels This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www dolby com Only amplifier and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo when in the THX Surround EX mode faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5 1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded In such case the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener e Boundary Gain Compensation Depending on the listener s and the subwoofer s position the listener may experience an excessive bass effect This feature compensates for excessive bass resulting from a boundary gain effect This feature is designed to operate when used with a subwoofer c
23. This indicates the input function currently selected for the receiver s zone 10 Receiver display The same information as on the receiver s display is displayed here 11 Master volume display This indicates the volume of the receiver s main zone using aS an icon and in decibels dB When the sound is muted the iX icon is displayed 12 Area indicating the receiver s status RF adapter Front Rear 1 LED 2 SETTING Use to pairing the RF adapter and remote control page 91 3 IR blaster terminals Connect the IR blaster cable page 92 Controls and displays Cz Remote control In case of SC 35 This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver ova OPEN RS Bln f mO L my oo DVR BDR HDMI CD _ NET RADIO ADAPTER iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS XM 3 7 INPUT SELECT TV CTRL RECEIVER _ P E ece A MASTER INPUT a TV CONTROL ce i DEO PARAMETER HOME MENU TUNE iPod CTRL AUTO ALC PGM MEMORY MENU DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR oe we ee THX PHASE CTRL_ STATUS TV DTV _MPX PQLS g LES ONO Eo HDMI OUT AUDIO SIGNALSEL MCACC SLEEP INFO ic CH_LEVEL A ATT DIMMER Ie D ACCESS CLASS Ce o he 9 ZONE2 ZONE3 LIGHT 14 Pioneer RECEIVER The remote has been conveniently color coded according to component control using the following system e White Receiver control TV control e Blue Other contro
24. downmixed En Connecting your equipment 03 Connecting other audio components This receiver has both digital and analog inputs allowing you to connect audio components for playback Most digital components also have analog connections When you set up the receiver you ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to see also he Inout Setup menu on page 45 Turntable CD R MD DAT etc Select one DIGITAL IN AUDIO IN OPTICAL R ANALOG L El Select one DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL R ANALOG L Wl O OUT1 IN h CONTROL 3 14 a aS aS a OUT 2 MONITOR OUT DVR BDR PHONO cD CD R TAPE OUT IN IN IN IN 1 TV SAT VIDEO IN IN SPEAKERS STABLE 12V SEE INSTRUCTION TRIGGER MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D EMPLOI OUTPUT 12V T TOTAL 150 mA MAX CAUTION SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 60 160 ATTENTION ENCEINTE D MPEDANCE DE 69 160 e f you re connecting a recorder connect the analog About the WMA9 Pro decoder audio outputs to the analog audio inputs on the This unit has an on board Windows Media Audio 9 recorder Professional WMAQ Pro decoder so it is possible to e You can t hear HDMI audio through this receiver s playback WMA9 Pro encoded audio using HDMI coaxial digital out jack or optical digital connection when connected to a WMAQ Pro c
25. front height or front wide speakers you can select according to format OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE See above OO Pro Logic IIx MUSIC See above Dolby Digital EX Creates surround back channel sound for 5 1 channel sources and provides pure decoding for 6 1 channel sources like Dolby Digital Surround EX e DTS ES Allows you to hear 6 1 channel playback with DTS ES encoded sources e DTS Neo 6 Allows you to hear 6 1 channel playback with DTS encoded sources D0 Pro Logic liz HEIGHT See above e WIDE SURROUND MOVIE See above e WIDE SURROUND MUSIC See above Straight Decode Plays back without the effects above Using the Home THX modes THX and Home THX are technical standards created by THX Ltd for cinema and home theater sound Home THX is designed to make home theater audio sound more like what you hear in a cinema Different THX options will be available depending on the source and the setting for surround back channel processing see THX Audio Setting on page 117 for more on this Note 06 Listening to your system 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode e Press THX HOME THX to select a listening mode With two channel sources press THX repeatedly to select a matrix decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode see THX Audio Setting on page 117 for an explanation of each process OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX CINEMA e DO PRO LOGIC THX CINEMA e N
26. on y available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro amp S Wave In addition to measurements at the listening position you can use two more reference points for which test tones will be analyzed for standing waves This is useful if you want to get a balanced flat calibration for several seating positions in your listening area Place the microphone at the reference point indicated on screen and note that the ast microphone placement will be at your main listening position 2nd reference 3rd reference Main listening position Note 3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone If you have a tripod use itto place the microphone so that it s about ear level at your normal listening position If you do not have a tripod use some other object to install the microphone 4 When you re finished setting the options select START then press ENTER 5 Follow the instructions on screen 6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting test tones A progress report is displayed on screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup Try to be as quiet as possible while it s doing this 4 e With error messages Such as Too much ambient noise or Check microphone select RETRY after checking for ambient noise see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 4
27. the receiver s power cannot be turned on unless RF Remote Setup is set to ON see RF Remote Setup SC 37 only on page 120 e When remote control operation is set to RF two way communications check whether the RF adapter is properly connected to the receiver Power cannot be turned off e Set the remote control s MULTI ZONE operation selector switch to ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 then press ZONE 2 ON or ZONE 3 ON is RECEIVER to switch the sub zone off displayed off or the iPod iPhone indicator blinks independent service company The receiver suddenly switches Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires If so re attach the speaker wires making sure there are no stray strands e The receiver may have a serious problem Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized Additional information Symptom During loud playback the power suddenly switches off The unit does not respond when the buttons are pressed AMP ERR blinks in the display then the power automatically switches off The ADVANCED MICACC blinks and the power does not turn on The PQLS flashes and power turns off OVERHEAT blinks in the display or AMP OVERHEAT and the power indicator flash and the power turns off The receiver suddenly power off or ADVANCED MCACC flashes Display blinks 12V TRG ERR Remedy e Turn down the volume e Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer leve
28. to onto this unit See Programming the Internet radio stations below for how to program Though the Internet radio stations are programmed in this receiver before it leaves the factory the link may have expired In that case preset the stations again yourself 1 Press NET RADIO to switch to the Internet radio 2 input The Internet Radio list screen is displayed Note 2 Use f to select the Internet radio station to play back and then press ENTER Press to scroll up and down the list and select the desired item When you press ENTER playback starts with the playback screen being displayed for the selected item Depending on the Internet line conditions the sound may not be smooth when playing Internet radio To return to the list screen press RETURN Programming the Internet radio stations By programming the Internet radio stations you wish to listen to onto this receiver you will be able to select those Internet radio stations You can program up to 24 stations There are two methods of programming one lets you use the GUI screen on this receiver the other lets you connect your computer and use that screen Programming with the GUI screen 1 Press TOP MENU when the Internet Radio station list is displayed The Internet Radio Setup screen is displayed 2 Use t to select the Internet Radio station list screen you wish to edit and then press ENTER 3 Use to select Edit e f you sel
29. 0099 0100 Sampo 0004 0006 0100 0107 En ED Additional information En Samsung 0004 0005 0006 0007 0022 0032 0076 0077 0083 0100 0110 Sansui 0025 Sanyo 0004 0050 Sceptre 0072 Scotch 0006 Scott 0004 0006 0007 0008 0009 0090 0104 Sears 0000 0004 0006 0009 0101 0102 0103 Sharp 0004 0006 0007 0014 0033 Sheng Chia 0014 Shogun 0004 Signature 0001 DVD Sony 0002 0018 0029 0030 0031 0034 Soundesign 0004 0006 0008 0009 0104 Squareview 0103 SSS 0004 0008 0104 Starlite 0008 0104 Superscan 0014 Supre Macy 0012 Supreme 0002 SVA 0088 Sylvania 0004 0006 0049 0079 0080 0100 0101 0103 Symphonic 0008 0041 0103 0104 Syntax 0054 Syntax Brillian 0054 Tandy 0014 Tatung 0003 0108 Technics 0010 0105 Techwood 0004 0006 0010 Teknika 0001 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0101 0104 TMK 0004 0006 TNCi 0099 Toshiba 0026 0028 0036 0038 0040 0048 0102 Vector Research 0100 Vidikron 0101 Vidtech 0004 0005 0006 Viewsonic 0058 0107 Viking 0012 Viore 0089 Vizio 0004 0070 0071 0108 Wards 0000 0001 0004 0005 0006 0009 0100 0101 Waycon 0102 Westinghouse 0047 0051 White Westinghouse 0023 Yamaha 0004 0005 0006 0100 Zenith 0001 0004 0011 0015 0099 If operations are not possible using the preset codes below you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the BD DVR BDR HDR Pioneer
30. 1002 Viewsonic 1017 Voodoo 1017 Wards 1002 1003 1004 1005 XR 1000 1004 1005 Yamaha 1000 1001 Zenith 1013 1018 ZT Group 1017 SEI 6139 Siemens 6007 6036 SKY 6042 6059 6030 6031 SM Electronic 6011 Smart 6051 Sonicview 6055 6107 Sony 6062 6063 6030 6143 Star Choice 6032 Star Trak 6032 TechniSat 6033 Thomson 6110 6111 6014 Tivo 6113 6114 6115 6116 Toshiba 6038 6054 6039 6130 TPS 6041 Triasat 6033 Ultrasat 6021 US Digital 6020 USDTV 6020 ViewSat 6048 Voom 6032 Zehnder 6101 Zenith 6042 6069 6037 6125 6127 6129 ED Additional information En Satellite Set Top Box SAT PVR Combination Pioneer 0126 0128 Bell ExpressVu 6002 6003 DirecTV 6070 6110 6062 6113 6060 6059 6114 6115 6116 Dish Network System 6002 6089 Cable Set Top Box Pioneer 6028 6029 6095 6099 ABC 6122 Accuphase 6122 Amino 6077 6078 Auna 6082 BCC 6072 Bell amp Howell 6122 Bright House 6074 6029 Cable One 6074 6029 Cablevision 6074 6029 Charter 6074 6029 6058 Cisco 6029 6028 6083 Comcast 6074 6029 1982 Cox 6074 6029 Digeo 6029 6058 Cable Set Top Box Cable PVR Combination Pioneer 0127 6029 Amino 6078 Bright House 6074 6029 Cable One 6074 6029 Cablevision 6074 6029 Charter 6074 6029 6058 CD Pioneer 5065 5066 AKAI 5043 Asuka 5045 Denon 5019 Fisher 5048 Goldstar 5040 CD R Pioneer 5067 Laser Disc Player Pioneer 5062 5063 Cassete
31. 117 Receiver cannot be operated JavaScript is disabled on the internet browser Enable JavaScript MOMMBLOW SEE The browser is not compatible with JavaScript Use an internet browser that is compatible with Javascript Receiver s power does not Network Standby at Network Setup is setto Set Network Standby at Network Setup to ON turn on when the power is OFF page 118 turned on using the Web Control function Additional information CH HDMI Symptom The HDMI indicator blinks continuously No picture or sound No picture No sound or sound suddenly ceases Noisy or distorted picture HDCP ERROR shows in the display When Control with HDMI is set to ON the HDMI Input assignment at Input Setup is canceled Synchronized operation not possible using Control with HDMI function Remedy e Check all the points below e This receiver is HDCP compatible Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP compatible If they are not please connect them using the component or composite video jacks e Depending on the connected source component it s possible that it will not work with this receiver even if it is HDCP compatible In this case connect using the component or composite video jacks between source and receiver e If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for su
32. 5 inches will end up with different size settings You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 114 e The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position This setting should be accurate taking delay and room characteristics into account and generally does not need to be changed e If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment we recommend adjusting the settings manually The Advanced MCACC menu e Standing Wave Control overly resonant low frequencies in your listening room see Standing Wave on page 107 The last two settings are specifically for customizing the parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 108 e EQ Adjust Manually adjust the frequency balance of your speaker system while listening to test tones see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 108 EQ Professional Calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers and make detailed settings according to your room s reverb characteristics see Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 108 Precision Distance SC 37 on y Fine adjusting the positions of the speakers see Precision Distance SC 37 only on page 110 Fine Channel Level e Default setting 0 0dB all channels You can achieve better surround sound by properly adjusting the overall balanc
33. 69 160 e When connecting to an HDMI DVI compatible monitor using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal switch the HDMI output setting to HDMI OUT 2 or HDMI OUT ALL See Switching the HDMI output on page 81 e Forinput components connections other than HDMI connections are also possible see Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output on page 30 e f you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver connect the receiver and TV with audio cables Note 1 When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections if the TV supports the HDMI Audio Return Channel function the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI terminal so there is no need to connect an audio cable In this case set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI see HDM Setup on page 73 En 03 Connecting your equipment Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output This diagram shows connections of a TV with HDMI input and DVD player or other playback component with no HDMI output to the receiver DVD player etc Oo OOOO O HDMI DVI compatible sel s leos monitor Select one Select one AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT R ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL ole B VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Pr PB KA Ve een P NA I w P OUT1 BD IN IN IN IN HDMI IN a B 3 4 CONTROL ASSIGNABLE p Gz Gz Fz Gz COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE N EJ _ DVD
34. 8 kHz to 48 kHz 16 bit 20 bit 24 bit 2 ch 8 kHz to 48 kHz 16 bit 2 ch 5 kbps to 320 kbps Supported Supported 8 kHz to 48 kHz 16 bit 2 ch 5 kbps to 320 kbps Supported Supported 32 kHz to 48 kHz 16 bit 2 ch 16 kbps to 320 kbps Supported Supported 8 kHz 16 kHz 22 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 8 bit 16 bit 2 ch 8 bit monaural audio is not Supported Not supported Supported a MPEG Layer 3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia b Only streaming data from servers is concerned so there is no extension Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs SC 37 only Glossary aacPlus AAC decoder uses aacPlus developed by Coding Technologies www codingtechnologies com coding Lj technologies aacPlus FLAC FLAC Free Lossless Audio Codec is an audio format allows lossless codec Audio is compressed in FLAC without any loss in quality For more details about FLAC visit the following website http Tlac sourceforge net vTuner vluner is a paid online database service that allows you to listen to radio and TV broadcasts on the Internet vluner lists thousands of stations from over 100 different countries around the globe For more detail about vluner visit the following website htto www radio pioneer com This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of NEMS and BridgeCo Use or distribution of such technology outside of
35. 956 674 5 974 380 5 978 762 6 226 616 6 467 000 1 212 072 350 929 1 092 195 1 272 007 amp other U S and worldwide patents issued amp pending DIS and the Symbol are registered trademarks amp DTS HD DTS HD Master Audio and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc Product includes software DTS Inc All Rights Reserved Windows Media Audio 9 Professional Windows Media Audio 9 Professional WMAQ9 Pro is a discrete Surround format developed by Microsoft Corporation Plays az Windows Media Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries About THX The THX technologies are explained below See www thx com for more detailed information In case of SC 37 In case of SC 35 e THX Cinema processing THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by THX Ltd THX grew from George Lucas personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack in both movie theatres and in your home theatre as faithful as possible to what the director intended Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions This same soundtrack is then transterred directly onto Laserdisc VHS tape DVD etc and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment THX engineers de
36. Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components see Setting the remote to contro other components on page 84 for more on this e Some units may take some time to power up in which case multiple operations may not be possible e Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode e Up to 5 commands can be programmed for System Off EO Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 En 8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 to program a sequence of up to commands Controlling components 9 When you re finished use to select EDIT This remote control can control components after EXIT from the menu and press ENTER entering the proper codes see Se ecting preset codes You will return to the remote control Setup menu Select directly on page 84 Set the remote contro operation EXIT SETUP to exit selector switch to SOURCE then press the input function buttons to select the component Using multi operations e TV CONTROL on the remote control are dedicated to You can start multi operations with the receiver switched control the TV assigned to the TV operation selector on or in standby switch If you have two TVs assign the main TV to the TV operation selector switch SOURCE x 3 f res mutt A OPERATION BDR _ _ SOURCE DVD HDN 1 Press MULTI OPERATION MULTI OPERATE flashes
37. Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area taking into account ambient noise speaker connection and speaker size and tests for both channel delay and channel level After you have set up the microphone provided with your system the receiver uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your particular room SC 37 only By performing the Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure the trequency phase characteristics of the connected speakers are also calibrated Once the Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed the Full Band Phase Control function is automatically turned on page 63 Q Important e Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup Using the Full Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup the headphones should be disconnected caution e The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume THX e THX is a trademark of THX Ltd which may be registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver 2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel e Push down on the lower portion of the front panel door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack 04 Bas
38. MENU 2 Use f to select IR RF SELECT then press ENTER Check that the units are paired If RECEIVER MAIN is displayed pairing has been performed properly so proceed to step 3 If RF MODE ONLY flashes pairing has not been performed properly so perform this procedure again after performing pairing see Pairing the RF adapter and remote contro on page 92 Note EO Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 3 Use f to select the receiver zone for which you want to use RF two way communications then press ENTER 4 Use t to select RF MODE then press ENTER Select IR MODE to return to operation by infrared signal 5 If you want to operate other zones with RF two way communications repeat steps 3 and 4 Operating other components by RF communications Up to 4 other components connected to the receiver can be operated by RF communications Use the IR blaster to communicate between the RF adapter and other components and switch the remote control s setting to RF The remote control s setting can be switched individually for each input To mount on a shelf above the component Double faced t To mount on the component Double faced tape Remote control sensor 1 When RECEIVER is selected and RF MODE is set at step 3 HMG NET RADIIO ADAPTER iPod USB and TUNER are automatically set to the RF mode Note that RF MODE cannot be set for OPTION 1 and OPTION 2 Controlling t
39. MULTIZONE connections 0e0 eee 37 Connecting to the network through LAN interface 38 Connecting Optional Bluetooth ADAPTER 39 Connecting an HDMI equipped component to the POOR POMS R sar ac s5s oe E E Ba ee 4 oats 39 CONMeCtINnG a AM Radio TUNE ao ae2icw ok mw ete atc 39 Connecting a sirtusConnect TUNE 605 sack oa a aac 39 CONMSCING SNMP OGne aseeceteadsteaeeeeeueees 40 COnnMecund a USS GeVICe 2246 406 lt 0008264 2505662 40 Connecting a USB device for Advanced MCACC CUlMDUT sae ta aeseu nee eae eat eae ees Scere es 40 Connecting onl rece ela lt eteccaceau see eoasee 41 Operating other Pioneer components with this LI OM O ae a Sk acon ets boo anaes ee oh eee ae ae 41 Switching components on and off using the 12 volt UO aonair ee Goss Bi Ses es Saw eran ae tel were erare 42 PIUGGING 10 TNE rece 6 4 dees aae tw BG ee eee 42 04 Basic Setup Changing the OSD display language Oo DLU AGE sareni dw deh eee ee A 43 Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning EME eG sare ates EE T E a ae a ae 43 Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup 45 Te OUT Se UO TGs dg acevo ew ace DA 45 Input function default and possible settings 46 05 Basic playback PIAViNG a SOUICE 1044 644408 on000000 20 4500 20 47 Playing a source with HDMI connection 47 Selecting the multichannel analog inputsS 47 Playing an IPod sas 6s es ns dae ews ee eae e eee 48 Playing back audio files stored on an iPod
40. Monitor BD DVD HDD DVR SAT CATV TOOLS t4 e ENTER HOME MENU RETURN U lt ALTO SETUP ANT AV SELECTION SCREEN SIZE AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY CH GH Chay OUTPUT RESOLUTION 4 a Controls for BD AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO DISPLAY w DISPLAY INFO aie U IL T Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 35 CH Button s ED CD CD R SACD MD DAT SOURCE POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF Number buttons numerics e dot gt 10 CLEAR l ENTER ENTER DISK ENTER CLASS tes wee j jenver feNTeR AUDIO PURE AUDIO DISPLAY INFO TIME a Controls for SACD b Controls for MD numerics CLEAR OPEN CLOSE CLEAR ENTER Button s TV Projector Nove 2 ____ STANDARO E C Ss E _ fesere C __ fesers C E C C C e t4 e t4 e E eo f lt lt frown gt pme o m po mo po m a C amo pse o POW ASPECT C Ce gt R OFF RAST ED The Advanced MCACC menu En Chapter 11 The Advanced MCACC menu Q Important e The procedure for setting the receiver operation mode differs for the remote controls included with the SC 37 and SC 35 For the SC 37 s remote control set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER For the SC 35 s remote control press the IRECEIVER button When set the remote control to the receiver operation mode is indicated in these instructions us
41. Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or Subwoofer If you didn t connect surround speakers choose NO the sound of the surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a Subwoofer e SB Select the number of Surround back speakers you have one two or none Select LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively Select SMALLx2 or SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect surround back speakers choose NO e SW LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when YES is selected Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you want deeper bass the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also routed to the su bwoofer If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO the bass frequencies are output from other speakers 3 Select X OVER and set the crossover frequency Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer or LARGE speakers 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu Channel Level Using the channel level settings you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system an important factor when setting up a home theater system 1 Select Channel Level from the Manual SP Setup menu 2 Select a setup option e MANU
42. USB to switch the remote ee p control to the iPod USB operation mode ue Pauses unpauses the slideshow DISP Displays the photo information a You can only use this button when Theme on the Slideshow Setup is set to Normal OFF Slideshow Setup Make the various settings for playing slideshows of photo files here 1 Use f to select Slideshow Setup from the USB Top menu 2 Select the setting you want Theme Add various effects to the slideshow SGD a Press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the e Interval Set the interval for switching the photos setting BGM Play music files stored on the USB device while displaying photos iPod USB operation mode This may not be available depending on the Theme e Music Select Select the folder containing the music files to be played when BGM is set to ON 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the USB Top menu Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device 1 Use f to select Photos from the USB Top menu 2 Use t to select a folder then press ENTER to browse that folder e To return to the previous level any time press RETURN 3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play then press gt to start playback The selected content is displayed in full screen and a slideshow starts After a slideshow launches pressing ENTER toggles between play a
43. about 10 meters This line of sight communications distance is a rough indication and may differ according to the surrounding environment En gt Controls and displays Chapter 2 Controls and displays Remote control In case of SC 37 This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver 1 RECEIVER sao os SOURCE 2 ZONE2 3 Joramon NET RADIO CD C me or 4 OPTION Pod Tuner 1 C2 MULTICH Gre Cin Woe a INPUTSELECT LIGHT E3 5 6 7 CATEGORY MENG iPod CTRL TUNE PTY SEARCH STATUS PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL THX MPX PQLS MEMORY AYTQALC STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR CeT 10 SIGNALSEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO 3 O A ATT SBch MCACC INFO 4 5 E e Jes HDMI OUT W 8 9 amp D ACCESS class CH ENTER En 11 The remote has been conveniently color coded according to component control using the following system e White Receiver control TV control e Blue Other controls See page 48 49 52 57 and 88 1 MULTI ZONE operation selector switch Switch to perform operations in the main zone ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 page 80 2 RECEIVER This switches between standby and on for this receiver 3 MULTI OPERATION Use this button to perform multi operations page 99 4 Input function buttons Press to select control of other components page 83 With these models the Sirius input is selected with the OPTION 1 button the XM input with the OPTION 2 button Also the
44. again to switch back to the receiver controls Note Playing a USB device It is possible to play files using the USB interface on the front of this receiver 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV See Connecting a USB device on page 40 2 SC 37 only Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE 3 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod USB Loading appears in the GUI screen as this receiver starts recognizing the USB device connected When the display shows the USB Top menu you re ready to play from the USB device Q Important If an Over Current message lights in the display the power requirements of the USB device are too high for this receiver Try following the points below e Switch the receiver off then on again e Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched off e Use a dedicated AC adapter Supplied with the device for USB power If this doesn t remedy the problem it is likely your USB device is incompatible Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory device The maximum number of levels that you can select in Step 2 below is 8 Also you can display and play back up to 30 000 folders and Tiles within a USB memory device 1 Use f to select Music from the USB Top menu 2 Use t to select a folder then press ENTER to browse that folder e To return to the previous level any time press RETURN 1 You cannot use this
45. application Other speaker CONNECT ONS acaca ee tra tasaisen eon Pacina the SISA E x a o oe aw wed caara sess ager ace ae sas THX speaker system setup Some tips for improving sound quality connecing the Speake keratina iria Installing your Speaker SYStEM 2 ee ee ee ees Standard surround CONNECTION 4002 seees saei Biarmnping your Speake Sak 0 vasa ine aes eee Biwirning YOU SOCAKELS ea aada ia a hae eae Selecting the Speaker system Font NSO So UDa ssia oo AA FON WOES UD a6 2 au ba dase sada eee oa Swe eee Speake DSC c6 0cuLodawbeaduee ipinin HAMONG AWD esa esa be R oe ZONE 2 setup ADoutihe audo cone ClO h nense esr ii ADOUT THIS VIGGO CONVETTED os aust acre eee oar ae eee ws About HDMI Connecting your TV and playback components COMMeCING Using THOM occece ease taeda 54 6858 08 Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI MOI nz eier E E LEE EE eres Se es ae ae Connecting your TV with no HDMI input Connecting an HDD DVD recorder BD recorder and other Adeo SOUlCeSs 4 obs open d dedd ba oan 2 Connecting a satellite cable receiver or other CCl O0 DOG deuwedeautd beadeee nde cae E as Connecting the multichannel analog inputs Connecting other audio COmMponentS s s s sss ss About the WMA9 Pro decoder 220s een ences Connecting additional amalie S seere 2 00 02 eae Connecting AM FM Antennas s lt 4 246s0000 ae008 36 COnmecting external antennas s e e08 ebo8 665 37 eZ ONE SOW ce ee ere Se a tees eee ee 37 Making
46. are displayed If No new firmware has been found is displayed there is no need to update the software Information on software updates may be posted on the Pioneer website http www pioneerelectronics com 07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs SC 37 only About playable file formats The Home Media Gallery feature of this receiver supports the following file formats Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats Also the compatibility of file formats varies depending on the type of server Check with your server to ensure the compatibility of file formats supported by your server Music files Category MP3 LPCM WMA FLAC Extension mp3 wma flac Stream MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 LPCM LPCM WMA2 7 8 WMAQ MPEG 4 AAC LC MPEG 4 HE AAC aacPlus v1 2 FLAC Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Bitrate VBR CBR Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Bitrate VBR CBR Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Bitrate VBR CBR Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Bitrate VBR CBR Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Bitrate VBR CBR 8 kHz to 48 kHz 16 bit 2 ch 8 kbps to 320 kbps Supported Supported 8 kHz to 48 kHz 16 bit 20 bit 24 bit 2 ch
47. as when input see About the video converter on page 27 e If this is set to something other than AUTO PURE and 480i 576i analog signals are input 480p 576p signals are output from the component output terminals c If the image doesn t match your monitor type adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the monitor e This setting is only displayed when 480i p or 576i p video signals are being input d This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input e 480i 576i 480p 576p 720p 1080i analog video signals e 480i 576i 480p 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 1080p24 HDMI video signals e This setting is valid for component outputs and HDMI output e This setting have the effect only for pictures recorded in the interlaced scan format 480i 576i or 1080i signals e P MOTION is disabled when PCINEMA is set to ON f You can t use this setting when the HDMI or component video signals are being input Note Switching the speaker terminals If you selected Speaker B at Speaker system setting on page 115 you can switch between speakers using the SPEAKERS button If you selected Normal SB FH Normal SB FW Front Bi Amp or ZONE 2 the button will simply switch your main speaker terminals on or off The options below are for the Speaker B setting only e Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to select a speaker system setting As mentioned above if you have selected Normal SB FH or Normal SB F
48. codes directly on page 97 Code If the desired operations cannot be performed learning even though you have set the preset codes the remote control signals of other devices can be learned directly See Programming signals from other remote controls on page 97 Multi A series of the remote control operations for operation starting listening or viewing can be programmed Multiple remote control codes can be set for the different input functions See Multi operation and System off on page 99 System off This is a function for automatically turning off the power of devices connected to the receiver Multiple remote control codes can be set as desired See Multi operation and System off on page 99 Direct This is a setting for changing only the remote function control unit s operation screen without changing the receiver s input when the remote control unit s input function buttons are pressed This is convenient for using the remote control unit for devices not connected to the receiver See Direct function on page 98 Erase This function is used to erase remote control learning codes that have been learned Codes learned for the different input functions can be erased individually See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 98 Back light The backlight lighting pattern can be selected trom among four modes in consideration of convenience and battery service life See
49. current MCACC preset 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press STATUS to check the system settings The front panel display shows each of the following settings for three seconds each Input function Sampling Frequency MCACC preset ZONE 2 input ZONE 3 input and HDMI OUT 2 When you re finished press STATUS again to switch off the display Note 1 The sleep timer is valid for all zones If any zone is on the sleep timer continues functioning 2 The synchronized amp mode is canceled when the HDMI output is switched If you wish to use the synchronized amp mode switch to HDMI OUT 1 then select the synchronized amp mode on the TV using the TV s remote control e When the power is turned off then back on after switching the HDMI output the input is set to a setting between HDMI1 and HDMIS3 or BD En 09 Using other functions Resetting the system Use this procedure to reset all the receiver s settings to the factory default Use the front panel controls to do this Set MULTI ZONE to OFF e Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device from the receiver beforehand 1 Switch the receiver into standby 2 While holding down ENTER on the front panel press STANDBY ON The display shows RESET lt NO gt 3 Select RESET using PRESET then press ENTER on the front panel The display shows RESET OK 4 Press ENTER to confirm OK appears in the display to indicate that the re
50. deVICE ee eee eee ees 58 Listening to music contents of a Bluetooth wireless technology device with your SySteM eee eee eee 58 06 Listening to your system PUTO Dey WO Chin a ea a E A 59 Listonin Ih SU NTOURIG SOUNG 2a dessin cick eave ates etd 59 StanGard lt sU rl OUN SOUL att chee sha a chee aes 59 Usmo TNE Fome THA MOG CS 4c ast fw aan ace es 60 Using the Advanced surround effectS sirana niia 61 LISTERIMGMIN SIC Te Ora seu hae aot er tadai E 61 Using Front Stage Surround Advance amita ia maisai 61 Uong team DIe ait eke hy Bee Se ae a 62 selecting VICAGCG PESES reri ranna e ara 62 CHOOSING THEA DUT GNA live aw aa oe tite a pried fans 62 beer sound using Phase COniol ss d aaee ec aes 62 Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Prase CONTO C 9701 raaraa a 63 07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs SC 37 only Enjoying the Fome Media Gallery s lt d 00v sat maaa 64 Features of Home Media Gallery 0e0eeeeee 64 EGUE ON ea di Sects apse Gtk ah Sosa mater arate th ess Be 64 Authorizing this reC iver eee eee ee es 64 Playback with Home Media Gallery 002005 65 Playing back audio files stored on components on Te Ley RCV OE a sara Gare ah i acne te sear 2a op tan aha lntee abr aS 65 Listening to Internet radio stationS 050000 66 LISTEMING LO Ts MAD Ody gone c cov OG a ane Nw aoe oleae 66 LISTENING tO SIMUSINIEMEr RaAGIOy c 04s dad Sea ete x 67 Listening to Neural Music Direct 200000 67
51. does not support the HDMI Audio Return Channel function this requires connection of an optical digital cable etc in addition to the HDMI cable The synchronized operations below can be used when the receiver s Control with HDMI function is connected to a player or recorder of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the Control with HDMI function e When playback starts on the player or recorder the receiver s input switches to the HDMI input to which that component is connected See the Pioneer website for the latest information on the models of non Pioneer brands and products that support the Control with HDMI function Control with HDMI function Setting the PQLS function PQLS Precision Quartz Lock System is a digital audio signal transfer control technology using the Control with HDMI function It offers higher quality audio playback by controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS compatible player etc This enables removing jitter that has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is generated upon transmission e SC 37 only On players compatible with PQLS Bit stream PQLS always works for all Sources e On players compatible with PQLS Multi Surround PQLS works for all sources Set the player s audio output to Linear PCM e On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio PQLS only works when playing CDs Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your player for more information T
52. e f your set top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal we recommend connecting it to the receiver s HDMI IN terminal When doing so also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI see Connecting using HDMI on page 29 03 Connecting your equipment Connecting the multichannel analog inputs For DVD Audio and SACD playback your DVD player may have 5 1 6 1 or 7 1 channel analog outputs depending on whether your player supports surround back channels Make sure that the player is set to output multichannel analog audio DVD player etc SUBWOOFER OUTPUT FRONT OUTPUT JQ CENTER SURROUND OUTPUT SURROUND BACK OUTPUT L IN IN J E E a ADAPTER F ouTPuTSV 100 mA MAX a SIRIUS COAXIA ASSIGNABLE OP CAL ASSIGNABLE ZONER ZONES OUT OUT 2 seeeeseees Jek SUBWOOFER DND l wipro SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring FM UNBAL 75 Q SELECTABLE 12V SEE INSTRUCTION TRIGGER MANUAL SELECTABLE r s Q Is A Ir OUTPUT VOIR LE MODE oe Row Vas aay D EMPLOI 2 TOTAL 150 mA MAX CAUTION SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 69 169 ENTION ENCEINTE DIMPEDANCE DE 60 169 e If there is a single Surround back output connect it to the SURROUND BACK L jack on this receiver e To use a 5 1 channel speaker set use the Surround speakers for the surround channel not the surround back channel e The audio signal input to MULTI CH IN cannot be
53. eienenn High Active High Level 2 0 V 12 VTMOGErIENMINA scare cceeeed 3 5 Mini jack MONO 12 V Trigger output type i anceseawiasca 12 V Total 150 mA RS 232C cable Ype 9 pin cross type female female EXTENSION terminal SC 35 only oo ee 5 V 150 mA CU RF100 terminal SC 37 only 0a 5 V 150 mA Network Section LAN terminal 0 0000 10 BASE 1 100 BASE TX Remote control unit SC 37 only OWE wade beh bok eh deeb aa noe ed eS ke be Dov Estimated line of sight transmission distance Radio frequency band cc cee eee eee 2 4 GHz Modulation system ade ee es Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS Dimensions 51 mm W x 255 mm H x 34 mm D 2 16 in W x 10 16 in H x 1 9 8 in D WOKE sa contacgeacothentachoneenatenan ae 190 g 0 4 Ib RF adapter SC 37 only POWE a g agia a Nou a Gia ah Ae e A A ae ee Gee eee eae A oy Estimated line of sight transmission distance E E A ee A Ge pear A L EA About 10 m Radio frequency band cece eee eee 2AGHZ Modulation system ae i ee ee Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS Dimensions 49 mm W x 21 mm H x 64 5 mm D 2 in W x 1 8 in H x 2 9 16 in D VV CVOI 5 05 8 eho 8 ode Shenk aR bee ed oe hee wk 90 g 0 2 Ib The line of sight transmission distance is an estimate Actual transmission distances supported may differ depending on surrounding conditions Miscellaneous Power requirements ae u5 6 40
54. for a while turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby 4 e The receiver s volume Audio parameters the tone controls for example and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal e Some digital sources are copy protected and can only be recorded in analog e Some video sources are copy protected These cannot be recorded 5 The attenuator isn t available with digital sources or when using the Stream Direct ANALOG DIRECT modes Using other functions Using the sleep timer Using the Web Control function The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a The receiver can be operated using a browser from a specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without computer connected on the same LAN as the receiver worrying about the receiver being left on all night Use the remote control to set the sleep timer 1 Turn on the computer and launch the Internet browser e Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time 30 min _ e You can check the remaining sleep time at any time This receiver s IP address can be found in the IP address by pressing SLEEP once Pressing repeatedly will Proxy menu page 117 cycle through the sleep options again 2 In the address bar on the browser enter the IP address assigned to this receiver For example if the IP address of this receiver is 192 168
55. for the different devices See Operating this receiver by RF communications and Operating other components by RF communications on page 92 OPERATION he remote control unit s operation screen MODE READ switches automatically when the receiver s input is switched This is only valid when the operation selector switch is set to SOURCE See Setting the remote control operation mode on page 94 KEY RESET This is a function for resetting preset codes that have been set Key resetting can be done for individual input functions See Resetting the input assignment of one of the input function buttons on page 86 ALL RESET This is a function for resetting all remote control unit settings you have made to the defaults set upon shipment from the factory See Resetting the remote control settings on page 86 The preset codes set for the different input PRESET ID functions can be checked See Confirming preset CHANGE RC MODE EXIT SETUP codes on page 86 If you have multiple Pioneer receivers amplifiers etc this setting can be used to prevent other units from operating simultaneously when the remote control unit is operated See Operating multiple receivers on page 84 Exits the setup menu Note e You can cancel or exit any of the steps by press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds To go back a step press RETURN e After one minute of inactivity the remote automatic
56. four a SHARP e dot ENTER CLASS COLOR TEMP t t e t t e eye lt lt fpow gt pm pe foo ie po mo p m o Pe C aoo rowno pir per CONTRAST Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 Using the RF communications function Operation of the receiver or other components placed in a rack is possible Operation is possible in any direction the remote control is pointed 860 With this receiver two way communications between the receiver and remote control are possible by connecting the included RF adapter to the RS 232C and CU RF100 terminals For instructions on connecting the RF adapter see Connecting the RF adapter SC 37 only on page 21 Two way communications allow you to use the following functions The receiver can be operated by pointing the remote control in any direction 860 maximum line of sight distance for two way communications about 10 meters Operate is possible without being affected by obstacles even products in racks can be operated The information shown on the receiver s display can be displayed on the remote control s display as you operate RF communications can be used to operate up to 4 other components connected to the receiver using the included IR blaster For details see Operating other components by RF communications on page 92 The remote control input display names can be synchronized
57. from other remote controls If the preset code for your component is not available or the available preset codes do not operate correctly you can program signals from the remote control of another component This can also be used to program additional operations buttons not covered in the presets after assigning a preset code 1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press HOME MENU The remote display shows SETUP MENU 2 Use t to select CODE LEARNING then press ENTER The remote display prompts you for the component you want to control for example DVD or TV 3 Press the input function button for the component you want to control then press ENTER PRESS KEY blinks in the remote display 4 Point the two remote controls towards each other then press the button that will be doing the learning on this receiver s remote control PRESS KEY lights continuously to indicate the remote is ready to accept a signal e The remote controls should be 3 cm 1 inch apart i ooo igh I o opoop Goo i 0 lboobpooYol o 5 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending teaching the signal to this receiver s remote control For example if you want to learn the playback control signal press and hold gt briefly The remote display will shows OK if the operation has been learned Note If for some reasons the operation hasn t been learned the remote display wil
58. front panel input 7 H CONTROL ON OFF O O O O O O OJO OJO TUNEREDIT BAND AUTOSURR ALC HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO MULTI ZONE SPEAKERS STREAM DIRECT THX SURROUND SURROU 0 HDMI 5 VIDEO CAMERA SETUP MIC PHONES LeCssees am eee BESS MULTI CH IN SIGNAL SiriusConnect HOME tuner You will also need to connect the antenna and AC adapter to the SiriusConnect tuner For instructions on playing the SIRIUS Radio see Listening to SIRIUS Radio on page 54 Video camera etc Note 1 The Bluetooth ADAPTER AS BT100 is sold separately 2 The Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device must support A2DP profiles e Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection and operation of this unit with all B uetooth wireless technology enabled devices Connecting your equipment e Switch the receiver into standby then connect your USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver e For instructions on playing the USB device see Playing a USB device on page 49 Connecting an iPod This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver e Switch the receiver into standby then use the supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod to the iPod iPhone USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver e Itis also possible to connect using th
59. function is selected No sound is output from the front speakers Remedy e Check the volume mute setting press MUTE and speaker setting oress SPEAKERS e Make sure the correct input function is selected e Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected e Make sure the correct input signal is selected press SIGNAL SEL Note that when PCM is selected you won t be able to hear any other signal format e Check that the source component is connected properly see Connecting your equipment on page 20 e Check that the speakers are connected properly see Connecting the speakers on page 24 No sound from the surround or Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn t selected center speakers No sound from surround back speakers No sound from front height or front wide speakers select one of the surround listening modes see Listening in surround sound on page 59 e Check that the surround center speakers are not set to NO see Speaker Setting on page 115 e Check the channel level settings see Channel Level on page 116 e Check the speaker connections see Connecting the speakers on page 24 e Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL and the surround speakers are not set to NO see Speaker Setting on page 115 e Check the speaker connections see Connecting the speakers on page 24 If only one surround back speaker is connected make sure
60. if it has been muted adjusting the volume also restores the sound Remote control display Remote control display for infrared signal transmission default Remote control display for RF two way 3 6 8 9 10 11 12 communications 1 Remote control operating zone indicator This indicates which zone the remote control is currently set to operate The display indicates the setting of the MULTI ZONE operation selector switch Only when RF two way communications The box display here indicates the communication status between this remote control unit and the receiver Cain White box with black letters Two way communications are established and the receiver s power is on 1 Press and hold in the LIGHT button for 5 seconds to change the illumination mode 1 or 2 When set to LIGHT MODE 2 default the illumination only lights when the remote control LIGHT button is pressed When switched to LIGHT MODE 1 the illumination lights whenever buttons are operated Setting LIGHT MODE 1 will shorten the service life of the batteries 2 The display lights when a remote control operation is performed then turns off after 20 seconds if no other operation is performed When in the Remote Setup mode the setup is canceled and the display turns off if no operation is performed for 1 minute page 83 3 This is displayed when an RF adapter is connected to the receiver and paired with the remote control For details see Using the RF
61. in the display 2 Press an input function button that has been set up with a multi operation The receiver switches on if it was in standby and the programmed multi operation is performed automatically Using System off MULTI OPERATIO BDR 1 Press MULTI OPERATION MULTI OPERATE flashes in the display 2 Press SOURCE The command sequence you programmed will run then all Ploneer components will switch offf followed by this 3 wW a e weee W Ce o e CH receiver Note 1 With this remote control the IR and RF modes can be selected separately for the individual input functions To perform a multi operation on a device input function for which the IR mode is selected point the remote control toward the remote sensor on that device 2 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording no DVD recorder power off codes are sent 3 With this remote control the IR and RF modes can be selected separately for the individual input functions To turn off the power of a device input function for which the IR mode is selected using the System Off function point the remote control toward the remote sensor on that device e When the power code of another brand is registered the power on off operation may be inverted When using the System Off function for a multi operation including the power codes of other brands always check that the power of all the components has turned o
62. last 3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this receiver and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not 4 Check whether the components connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed 08 Control with HDMI function En About synchronized operations The Control with HDMI compatible component connected to the receiver operates in sync as described below e From the menu screen of the Control with HDMI compatible TV set audio to be played through this receiver and the receiver will switch to the synchronized amp mode e When in the synchronized amp mode you can adjust the receiver s volume or mute the sound using the TV s remote control e When in the synchronized amp mode the synchronized amp mode is canceled when the receiver s power is turned off To turn the synchronized amp mode back on set audio to be played through the receiver from the TV s menu screen etc This receiver will power up and switch to the synchronized amp mode e When the synchronized amp mode is canceled the receiver s power turns off if you were viewing an HDMI input or a TV program on the IV e When in the synchronized amp mode the synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation that produces sound from the TV is performed from the TV s menu screen etc e When the IV s power is set to standby the receiver s power is also set to standby Only when the input fo
63. music can also be enjoyed on devices equipped with SCMS T type Bluetooth wireless technology Remote control operation The remote control supplied with this unit allows you to play and stop media and perform other operations 2 It must be necessary that the Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device supports AVRCP profiles e Remote control operations cannot be guaranteed for all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices 05 Basic playback En Pairing the B uetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device Pairing must be done before you start playback of Bluetooth wireless technology content using the Bluetooth ADAPTER Make sure to perform pairing the first time you operate the system or any time pairing data is cleared The pairing step is necessary to register the Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable Bluetooth communications For more details see also the operating instructions of your B uetooth wireless technology device 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press HOME MENU 2 Select System Setup then press ENTER 3 Select Other Setup then press ENTER 4 Select Pairing Bluetooth Device then press ENTER 5 Select the Passcode setting you want Select the same passcode as the G uetooth wireless technology device you wish to connect e 0000 1234 8888 Select the passcode from these options These are the passcodes that ca
64. on the external controller being used playback may be interrupted when a volume operation is performed trom the controller In case of Windows Media Player 11 You are currently logged onto the domain through your PC with Windows XP or Windows Vista installed In case of Windows Media Player 12 You are currently logged onto the domain through your PC with Windows 7 installed The firewall settings for components on the network are currently in operation You are currently disconnected from the Internet The broadcasts from an Internet radio station are stopped or interrupted The remote control is not currently set to the Home Media Gallery mode Remedies If the client is automatically authorized you need to enter the corresponding information again Check whether the connection status is set to Do not authorize Check the audio files stored on the component connected to the network Check whether the audio file was recorded in a format supported by this receiver Check whether the folder has been damaged or corrupted Note that there are cases where even the audio files listed as playable on this receiver cannot be played back or displayed page 70 Connect the LAN cable properly page 38 Use 100BASE TX to access the components on the network In this case adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control Instead of logging onto the domain log onto the local machine page 65 Check
65. only Used to check the speakers group delay both before and after calibration See Group Delay SC 37 only on page 111 for more on this e Output MCACC data See Output MCACC data on page 112 for more on this 1 Ifthe microphone is placed in a different position from when the Auto MCACC procedure was performed it may not be possible to adjust properly In this case we recommend performing the procedure at Fine Speaker Distance on page 107 in the Auto MCACC custom measurements then performing the adjustment described here without moving the microphone e The adjustment here is for adjusting for an error of 1 2 inch or less not adjustable with the Auto MCACC Setup 0 0 may be displayed after distance correction with the Auto MCACC Setup but even in this case this adjustment allows you to optimize the correction Note that if the Auto MCACC Setup is performed after completing the fine adjustment here the correction precision will drop to about 1 2 inch e Like with the Auto MCACC Setup perform this adjustment in as quiet an environment as possible 0 0 will be displayed if abrupt noise is input during the adjustment e The distance for all the channels can only be made uniform even if the R front right channel is adjusted in the proper order e Be very careful not to tip the speakers over when moving them e The result of the adjustment performed here can be checked by listening to the test pul
66. or other soft surfaces e High places such as tabletops and sofa tops 2 If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes the screen saver will appear 3 When data measurement is taken the reverb characteristics data both before and after calibration that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten If you want to save the reverb characteristics data before measuring connect a USB memory device to this receiver and transfer the data e When measurement is taken of the reverb characteristics data other than SYMMETRY the data are not measured after the correction If you will need to measure after correcting data take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC setup page 106 4 f you are planning on bi amping your front speakers or setting up a separate speaker system in another room read through Speaker system setting on page 115 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4 Basic Setup e f you see an ERR message or the speaker configuration displayed isn t correct there may bea problem with the speaker connection If selecting RETRY doesn t work turn off the power and check the speaker connections If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply use to select the speaker and to change the setting and continue If Reverse Phase is displayed the speaker s wiring and may be inverted Check the speaker conn
67. performance a 1O0BASE TX connection between player and PC is recommended e f several clients are playing simultaneously as the case may be playback is interrupted or stalled e Depending on the security software installed on a connected PC and the setting of such software network connection may be blocked Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the player and or the Home Media Gallery features due to communication error malfunctions associated with your network connection and or your PC or other connected equipment Please contact your PC manufacturer or Internet service provider Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing Inc Microsoft Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows Millennium Edition Windows 98 and WindowsNT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Software update The Home Media Gallery software can be updated over the Internet 1 Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE 2 Press HMG to select Home Media Gallery as the input function 3 Select Setup then press ENTER 4 Select Firmware Update then press ENTER 5 Use f to select Yes then press ENTER Updating and the elapsed time
68. power source are not causing interference e Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Setup menu e Check the HDMI Input assignment in the Input Setup menu then try OFF e See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 to set up your system again using MCACC this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output e Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF see Volume Setup on page 119 e The channel level setting may be over OdB ADAPTER PORT Symptom Remedy The B uetooth wireless technology device cannot be connected or operated Sound trom the G uetooth wireless technology device is not emitted or the sound is interrupted e Check that no object that emits electromagnetic waves in the 2 4 GHz band microwave oven wireless LAN device or Bluetooth wireless technology apparatus is near the unit If such an object is near the unit set the unit far from it Or stop using the object emitting the electromagnetic waves e Check that the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not too far from the unit and that obstructions are not set between the G uetooth wireless technology device and the unit Set the B uetooth wireless technology device and the unit so that the distance between them is less than about 10 m and no obstructions exist between them e Check that the Bluetooth ADAPTER and the ADAPTER PORT of the unit are correctly connected e The Bluetooth wireless technology
69. ranges If the IP address defined is beyond the following ranges you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations Class A 10 0 0 1 to 10 255 255 254 Class B 172 16 0 1 to 172 31 255 254 Class C 192 168 0 1 to 192 168 255 254 Subnet Mask In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly connected to this receiver enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP on paper In most cases enter 205 200 255 0 Default Gateway In case a gateway router is connected to this receiver enter the corresponding IP address Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server In case there is only one DNS server address provided by your ISP on paper enter it in the Primary DNS Server field In case there are more than two DNS server addresses enter Secondary DNS Server in the other DNS server address field Proxy Hostname Proxy Port This setting is required when you connect this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server Enter the IP address of your proxy server in the Proxy Hostname field Also enter the port number of your proxy server in the Proxy Port field Tip e Press or the numeric buttons to enter alohanumeric characters To delete alohanumeric characters entered one at atime press CLEAR Note gt The System Setup and Other Setup menus 1 Select IP Address Proxy from the Network Setup menu 2 Select the DHCP setting you
70. receiver 2 Set the RF Remote Setup on this receiver s Other Setup menu to ON For details see RF Remote Setup SC 37 only on page 120 3 Press the SETTING button on the front of the RF adapter RF adapter s LED blinks red 4 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press VIDEO PARAMETER on the remote control The remote display shows PAIRING 5 Press ENTER on the remote control AUTHORIZATION flashes and pairing is performed When pairing is successful SUCCESS is displayed and pairing is completed RF adapter s LED lights green The display on the receiver itself is displayed on the remote control s display For details see Remote control display on page 13 If ERROR is displayed pairing has not been successful Check the connections and distance with the RF adapter then start over from step 1 The remote control unit s receiver operation mode must be setto RF in order to operate the receiver with RF two way communications Make this setting as described at Operating this receiver by RF communications below Operating this receiver by RF communications Use this procedure to make the remote control settings to operate the receiver using RF two way communications The settings can be made individually for the main zone ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 Connect the receiver and RF adapter and pair the RF adapter and remote control unit beforehand 1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press HOME MENU The remote display shows SETUP
71. switch automatically to that input Select OFF if you do not want the remote control s function to switch automatically when the receiver s input is switched 1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press HOME MENU The remote display shows SETUP MENU 2 Use t to select OPERATION MODE then press ENTER Check that the units are paired If SYNCHRO ON is displayed pairing has been performed properly so proceed to step 3 If RF MODE ONLY flashes pairing has not been performed properly so perform this procedure again after performing pairing see Pairing the RF adapter and remote contro on page 92 3 Use f to select SYNCHRO ON or SYNCHRO OFF then press ENTER The remote display shows OK to confirm the setting 4 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds to exit and store the operation s Precautions when using the Omni Directional RF Remote Control Precautions regarding wavelength e This remote control is designed to prevent other persons from eavesdropping on the transmitted signals but precautions should nonetheless be taken against the chance that other persons could intercept and listen to the signals transmitted Given that this remote control produces radio wave transmissions another person could deliberately use a receiver to attempt to intercept such transmissions As a result this device should not be used to play important transmissions demanding privacy This remot
72. the erasing has been successfully completed Default preset codes Input function button Preset code DVD 2log BD 2100 DVR BDR 2150 HDMI 2159 TV 0116 CD 5066 TV CTRL 0116 Note 1 When preset codes are set all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared This function is convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons Controlling components This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes see Setting the remote to control other components on page 97 for more on this Use the input function buttons to select the component e The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL button If you have two TVs assign the main TV to the TV CTRL button SOURCE Jo J On CD Oe O 5 6 CJ 2 CH En EO Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 35 En SOURCE POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF Number buttons numerics numerics numerics ed ee KUROUNK CLEAR ooo o ENTER ENTER CH ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER CLASS xo EXIT INFO EXIT TOP MENU TOP MENU ae LIST x TOOLS GUIDE USER MENU GUIDE ae GUIDE EPG tte tiie te Hees j tes e isk MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU i ieee RETURN RETURN RETURN eT RETURN HDD ed Red fe p elon pw Yeon VCR gt lt Be e pe VENU Button s TV TV
73. the firewall settings for components on the network Check the connection settings tor components on the network and consult with your network service provider if necessary page 117 There are cases where you cannot listen to some Internet radio stations even when they are listed in the list of Internet radio stations on this receiver page 66 Press HMG to set the remote control to the Home Media Gallery mode page 65 About status messages SC 37 only Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the Home Media Gallery Status messages Descriptions STARTING H M G Connection Down File Format Error Track Not Found Server Error Server Disconnected empty Preset Not Stored Out of Range License Error A component on the network including a PC is currently being connected Wait for a while The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed Cannot be played back for some reasons The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network The selected server cannot be accessed The server has been disconnected There are no files stored in the selected folder The selected Internet radio station is not currently registered and saved The value entered is beyond the permitted range of the network settings The license for the contents to be played back is invalid Additional information cr Status messages Descriptions Item Alrea
74. the setup and playback procedures required to enjoy these features It is advisory that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component Features of Home Media Gallery This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal and you can enjoy the following features by connecting your components to these terminals e Playback the music files stored in PCs You can playback a lot of musics stored in your PCs using this unit See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 65 and Playing back audio files stored on components on the network on page 65 e Listening to Internet radio stations You can select and listen to your favorite Internet radio station from the list of Internet radio stations created edited and managed by the vl uner database service exclusively for use with the Pioneer products See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 65 and Listening to nternet radio stations on page 66 e Listening to Rhapsody Sirius or Neural Music Direct See Listening to Rhapsody on page 66 See Listening to Sirius Internet Radio on page 67 See Listening to Neural Music Direct on page 67 Note Introduction The Home Media Gallery allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network LAN as the receiver This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following e PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP with Windows Media Player 11 instal
75. the speaker orientation If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same direction the tone will not be the same on the right and left and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced properly However if all the speakers are pointed towards the listening position the sound field will seem cramped Testing by the Pioneer Multi channel Research Group has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be achieved by pointing all the speakers towards an area 30 cm to 80 cm 12 inches to 31 inches behind the listening position between the surround speakers and the listening position However the sense of sound positioning can differ according to the conditions in the room and the speakers being used In smaller environments in particular when the front speakers are close to the listening position with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward We suggest you use this example of installation as reference when trying out different installation methods Step 4 Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer Placing the subwoofer between the center and front speakers makes even music Sources Sound more natural if there is only one subwoofer it doesn t matter if it is placed on the left or right side The low bass sound output from the subwoofer is not directional and there is no need to adjust the height Normally the subwoofer is placed on the floor Put it in a position at which it will not cancel out the bass s
76. to another see Copying MCACC preset data on page 113 e MCACC Memory Clear Clear any MCACC presets that you don t want see Clearing MCACT presets on page 113 Renaming MCACC presets If you have several different MCACC presets that you re using you may want to rename them for easier identification 1 Select Memory Rename from the Data Management setup menu 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename then select an appropriate preset name Use f to select the preset then to select a preset name 3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary then press RETURN when you re finished You will return to the Data Management setup menu 1 MCACC data and parameters are transferred from this receiver to a USB device and by connecting the USB device to a computer the data is imported via the MCACC software in the computer See Connecting a USB device for Advanced MCACC output on page 40 for more on this 2 Only for the SC 37 since this function is supported by the display of the group delay characteristics 3D graphs 3 Only one set of reverb characteristics is stored on the receiver If you wish to compare several different measurement results transmit the data to the USB memory each time reverb measurements are taken 4 This can be done in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 or Automatic MCACCT Expert on page 104 either of which you should have already com
77. want When you select ON the network is automatically set up and you do not need to follow Steps 3 Proceed with Step 4 If there is no DHCP server on the network and you select ON this receiver will use its own Auto IP function to determine the IP address 2 3 Enter the IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server Press f to select a number and to move the Cursor 4 Select OFF or ON for the Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate or activate the proxy server In case you select OFF proceed with Step 7 In case you select ON on the other hand proceed with Step 5 5 Enter the address of your proxy server or the domain name 6 Enter the port number of your proxy server Use the numeric buttons to enter the port number 7 Select OK to confirm the IP Address Proxy setup Checking the MAC address You can check the MAC address 1 Select Information from the Network Setup menu Network Standby This setting allows the Web Control function page 81 for operating the receiver from a computer connected on the same LAN as the receiver to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode 1 Select Network Standby from the Network Setup menu 2 Specify whether the Network Standby is ON or OFF e ON The Web Control function can be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode e OFF he Web Control function ca
78. wire antenna adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall etc there is considerable noise in Use an outdoor antenna for better reception see page 37 radio broadcasts For AM broadcasts e Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna e Use an outdoor antenna for better reception see page 37 e Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment such as a fluorescent light motor etc Switch off or move the other equipment or move the AM antenna Noise is output when scanning This is not a malfunction of the receiver The scan function of your player alters the digital a DIS CD information making it unreadable resulting in noise being output Lower the volume when scanning When playing a DTS format LD Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on page 62 there is audible noise on the soundtrack Can t record audio e You can only make a digital recording from a digital source and an analog recording from an analog source e For digital sources make sure that what you re recording isn t copy protected e Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks see Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 34 Subwoofer output is very low To route more signal to the subwoofer set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL see Speaker Setting on page 115 Everything seems to be setup The speakers may be out of ph
79. with the input names changed at Input Name on the receiver s Input Setup menu page 45 and acquired automatically For details see Renaming input function names in synchrony with the receiver on page 93 IR blaster only required when you want to operate other components by RF two way communications max 4 components T vo v ANTENNA AMLOOP FMUNBAL75 Q Remote control operation e When the receiver s input is switched the remote control s display and operating mode switch to that input automatically For details see Setting the remote control operation mode on page 94 Q Important e The line of sight communications distance is a rough indication and may differ according to the surrounding environment e Depending on the communications environment functions using two way communications between the receiver and remote control may not operate properly For details including cautions on the communications environment and usage procedure etc see Precautions when using the OMni Directional RF Remote Contro on page 94 Note e You can cancel or exit any of the steps by press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds To go back a step press RETURN Pairing the RF adapter and remote control Pairing is necessary in order to use the RF communications function Perform the operation below after connecting the RF adapter and receiver 1 Switch on the
80. 0 160 E 62 160 e subwoofer e You can use the additional amplifier on the surround back channel pre outs for a single speaker as well In this case plug the amplifier into the left L Single terminal only The sound from the surround back terminals will depend on how you have configured the Speaker system setting on page 115 e To hear sound only from the pre outs switch the speaker system to OFF or simply disconnect any speakers that are connected directly to the receiver If you re not using a subwoofer change the front speaker setting see Speaker Setting on page 115 to LARGE Connecting AM FM antennas Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna as shown below To improve reception and sound quality connect external antennas see Connecting external antennas on page 37 1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna wires 2 Push open the tabs then insert one wire fully into each terminal then release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires 3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand To fix the stand to the antenna bend in the direction indicated by the arrow fig a then clip the loop onto the stand fig b e Ifyou plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other surface secure the stand with screws fig c before clipping the loop to the stand Make sure the reception is clear 4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and ina direction giving the best reception 5 Con
81. 0 2 enter http 192 168 0 2 60 min When the connection is made with the receiver a Top 90 min Menu will be displayed 3 Once the Top Menu is displayed click the button for the zone you want to operate Dimming the display 4 Operate from the screen for the individual zone e Even when the receiver is in the standby mode it can be turned on using the Web Control function For details see Network Standby on page 118 You can choose between four brightness levels for the front panel display Note that when selecting sources the display automatically brightens for a few seconds Pioneer Web Control e Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness of the front panel display VOLUME 60 0dB O MUTE INPUT SELECT v Switchina the HDMI output ustennewooe s0 OOOO E A put Set which terminal to use when outputting video and audio signals from the HDMI output terminals The HDMI OUT1 terminal is compatible with the Control with HDMI function e Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press HDMI OUT Checking your system settings Please wait a while when Please wait is displayed Use the status display screen to check your current The output switches among HDMI OUT ALL HDMI OUT settings for features Such as Surround back channel 1 and HDMI OUT 2 each time the button is pressed processing and your
82. 0 967 2346 Canadian customers should visit xmradio ca or call XM Listener Care at 1 877 GEITXMSR 1 877 438 9677 To subscribe to SIRIUS U S and Canadian customers can call 1 888 539 SIRI 1 888 539 7474 or visit sirius com US or siriuScanada ca Canada Listening to XM Radio For details on XM Radio see About S RIUS and XM on page 137 1 SC 37 only Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE 2 Press OPTION 2 SC 37 XM SC 35 to switch to the XM RADIO input For best reception you may need to move the XM Mini Tuner antenna near a window the southernmost window should produce the best results e f after pressing OPTION 2 SC 37 XM SC 35 the display shows Check XM Tuner or Check Antenna try disconnecting the receiver and tuner connections and then plugging them back in After connecting you will be able to use this receiver to select channels and navigate categories using the GUI screen Selecting channels and browsing by genre From the XM Channel Guide you can browse XM Radio channels in the order that they appear or you can narrow your channel search by genre 1 Press f to enter the XM Channel Guide navigate through the channels one at time with f then press ENTER to listen to the XM radio broadcast e To browse by genre first press CATEGORY use to select a genre then press ENTER e To cancel and exit any time press RETURN e Tip e You can select ch
83. 0002 0004 0006 KEC 0104 Kenwood 0004 0006 0100 KLH 0106 Kloss Novabeam 0008 0012 KTV 0008 0100 0104 0110 LG 0005 0052 0078 0097 Logik 0001 Luxman 0004 0006 LXI 0000 0006 0101 0102 Magnavox 0004 0006 0019 0020 0037 0042 0100 0101 Majestic 0001 Marantz 0004 0006 0062 0100 0101 Matsushita 0105 Maxent 0087 0107 Megapower 0097 Megatron 0006 Memorex 0001 0005 0006 0041 MGA 0004 0005 0006 0100 Midland 0010 0011 0099 Mintek 0091 Mitsubishi 0004 0005 0006 0014 0045 Monivision 0097 Montgomery Ward 0001 Motorola 0003 0014 MTC 0004 0005 0006 0100 Multitech 0008 0104 0110 NAD 0006 0102 NEC 0003 0004 0005 0006 0100 Net TV 0107 Nikko 0006 0100 Norcent 0060 Olevia 0048 0054 0059 Onwa 0008 0104 Oppo 0095 Optimus 0105 Optoma 00 5 Optonica 0014 Orion 0025 Panasonic 0003 0010 0017 0027 0105 0114 0120 0121 0124 0125 Penney 0100 0102 Philco 0008 0004 0005 0006 0007 0100 0101 Philips 0003 0004 0007 0019 0020 0101 Philips Magnavox 0019 Pilot 0004 0100 Polaroid 0057 0106 Portland 0004 0005 0006 Prima 0065 Princeton 0097 Prism 0010 Proscan 0000 Proton 0004 0006 0007 Protron 0055 Proview 0068 Pulsar 0004 0011 0099 Quasar 0003 0010 0105 Radio Shack 0100 0104 Radio Shack Realistic 0000 0004 0006 0007 0008 RCA 0000 0003 0004 0005 0006 0013 0024 0035 Realistic 0100 0104 Runco 0011
84. 106 do not appear to filters dedicated to overall system calibration change the graphical output Lower frequency response e Low frequencies used in bass management the subwoofer channel will not change for speakers curves do not seem to have that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration or do not output these frequencies been calibrated for SMALL e Calibration is performed but due to your speakers low frequency limitations no measurable speakers sound is output for display Display Symptom Remedy The display is dark or off e Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness You can t get DIGITAL to e Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly see The display when using SIGNAL Input Setup menu on page 45 SEL e If the multichannel analog inputs are selected select a different input function OO DIGITAL or DTS does not These indicators do not light if playback is paused eo when playing Dolby DTS e Check the playback especially the digital output settings of the source component software When playing Dolby Digital or Check that the player is connected using a digital connection DTS sources the receiver s e Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on page 62 format indicators do not light e Check that the player isn t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM e Ensure that if t
85. 2014 2158 Accurian 2092 Advent 2072 Aiwa 2012 Akai 2066 Alco 2070 Allegro 2087 Amphion MediaWorks 2037 AMW 2037 Apex 2002 2018 2079 2080 Apple 2058 Arrgo 2088 Aspire 2073 Astar 2052 Audiovox 2070 Axion 2040 Bang amp Olufsen 2081 Blaupunkt 2080 Blue Parade 2078 Boston 2059 Broksonic 2066 California Audio Labs 2068 CambridgeSoundWorks 2065 CineVision 2087 Coby 2029 Curtis Mathes 2089 CyberHome 2000 2088 Cytron 2039 Daewoo 2021 2087 BD Denon 2026 2068 Desay 2055 DiamondVision 2042 Disney 2022 Durabrand 2090 Emerson 2067 2082 2091 Enterprise 2082 ESA 2053 2091 Fisher 2083 Funai 2091 GE 2016 2077 2080 GFM 2043 Go Video 2087 Gradiente 2068 Greenhill 2080 Haier 2094 Harman Kardon 2030 2084 Hitachi 2011 Hiteker 2079 iLive 2062 Ilo 2038 Initial 2038 2080 Insignia 2036 2064 2091 Integra 20 8 iSymphony 2060 JBL 2084 JVC 2013 Kawasaki 2070 Kenwood 2028 2068 KLH 2070 2080 Koss 2024 2069 2075 Landel 2093 Lasonic 2085 Lenoxx 2074 2090 LG 2019 2051 2061 2082 2087 Liquid Video 2075 Liteon 2025 2092 Magnavox 2067 2076 2091 Memorex 2066 Microsoft 2077 Mintek 2038 2080 2086 Mitsubishi 2020 Nesa 2080 Next Base 2093 Nexxtech 2056 Onkyo 2076 Oppo 2041 2057 Oritron 2069 2075 Panasonic 2005 2007 2017 2032 2033 2050 2068 2076 Philips 2045 2076 Proceed 2079 Proscan 207 7 Qwestar 2069 RCA 2008 2016 2070 207
86. 37 only on page 21 e The devices may no longer be properly paired Pair them again see Pairing the AF adapter and remote control on page 92 e When the remote control or main unit are reset the RF communications function is also reset Make the settings again see Using the RF communications function on page 91 SC 37 only The remote control Flickering may occur when the remaining battery power is low Replace the batteries with new display flickers ones see Loading the batteries on page 10 Other components can t be e f the battery ran down the preset codes may have been cleared Re enter the preset codes operated with the system e The preset code may be incorrect Redo the procedure for entering preset codes remote e When commands from the remote control units of other devices are registered using the learning function in some cases they may not be learned properly In this case register the commands again using the learning function see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 85 SC 37 page 97 SC 35 If they still do not work they may be in a special format that cannot be registered on this receiver s remote control Operate the device using another remote control Web Control Symptoms Causes Remedies Top Menu screen is not This receiver s IP address has not been entered Check the receiver s IP address and enter it displayed on browser into the browser correctly correctly in the browser page
87. 5 Note that this will only work with components that have a standby mode OUT 1 CONTROL BD IN IN IN IN IN i B 3 4 F F GH Gz ASSIGNABLE E a MONITOR OUT ONE2 ZONE3 l IDEO DVD TV SAT VIDEO _ DVR BDR IN IN TOONE IN IN SIGNAL GND AMLOOP SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL VOIR LE M D EMPLOI e Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to the 12 V trigger of another component Use a cable with a mono mini plug on each end for the connection After you ve specified the input functions that will switch on the trigger you ll be able to switch the component on or off just by pressing the input function s you ve set on page 45 Itis also possible to have the component switch not when the input function is switched but when HDMI OUT is switched For details see HDM Setup on page 73 Note 03 Connecting your equipment Plugging in the receiver Only plug in after you have connected all your components to this receiver including the speakers 1 Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket on the back of the receiver 2 Plug the other end into a power outlet 1 A caution e Handle the power cord by the plug part Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock Do not place the unit a pie
88. 5 and verifying the mic connection If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply select GO NEXT and continue 7 If necessary confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen The configuration shown on screen should reflect the actual speakers you have 1 e When data measurement is taken after selecting ALL or Keep SP System the reverb characteristics data both before and after calibration that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten If you want to save the reverb characteristics data before measuring connect a USB memory device to this receiver and transfer the data e When measurement is taken of data other than SYMMETRY after selecting ALL or Keep SP System the data are not measured after the correction If you will need to measure after correction data take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC setup page 106 e The EQ Pro amp S Wave measurement is also taken when Keep SP System or EQ Pro amp S Wave is selected See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 108 for more on this e Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset For details see Setting the Audio options on page 76 2 If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as your Auto MCACC menu you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the SYMMETRY ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings 3 It ma
89. 500 ae aa aaa AG 120 V 60 Hz POWE CONSUMIDHON 4 60090 od tade d edie a sire wd 330 W I StaNnODY oe awe a 0 2 W HDMI Setup Control OFF 0 3 W HDMI Setup Control ON Dimensions 420 mm W x 200 mm H x 460 mm D 16 2 16 in W x7 1 8 in H x 18 1 8 in D Weight without package 0 0 eae 18 5 kg 40 8 Ib EE Additional information Number of Furnished Parts Incase of SC 37 Cleaning the unit r MORACEAE aa i e Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and Omni directional dirt remote control CU RF100 AXD7580 1 0 0 0 1 ue RF adapter AXX7272 ooo a 1 e When the surface is dirty wipe with a soft cloth IR blaster cable ADF7007 oo ccc cece eee 2 dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six AA LRO dry cell DANCES 4 suncwnbdowdeeaboaweawewns 4 times with water and wrung out well and then wipe iPod cable cee e teen nee n eens 1 again with a dry cloth Do not use furniture wax or AM loop antenna susuan aaa aa 1 cleansers FM wire ANTENNA vee eee 1 e Never use thinners benzene insecticide sprays or Power COM vive einer eee l other chemicals on or near this unit since these will Warranty card ee ee ees ee SS ee a corrode the surface These operating instructions Incase of SC 35 MCACC Setup microphone APM7009 00 000 1 This product includes FontAvenue fonts licenced by NEC corporation Remote control unit AXD7591 ooo cece een 1 FontAvenue is a registere
90. 6 to 6 dB Default 0 dB 6 to 6 dB Default 0 dB OFF ON FLAT UP1 UP2 UP3 UPa OFF ON Using other functions CH Setting What it does DUAL Specifies how dual mono Dual encoded Dolby Digital Mono soundtracks should be played Dual mono is not widely used but is sometimes necessary when two languages need to be sent to separate channels DRC Adjusts the level of dynamic Dynamic range for movie soundtracks Range optimized for Dolby Digital DTS Control Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD DTS HD and DTS HD Master Audio you may need to use this feature when listening to surround sound at low volumes LFE Some audio sources include LFE ultra low bass tones Set the LFE Attenuate attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra low bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB which is the recommended value When set to 5 dB 10 dB 15 dB or 20 dB the LFE is limited by the respective degree When OFF is selected no sound is output from the LFE channel SACD Brings out detail in SACDs by GAIN maximizing the dynamic range during digital processing HDMI Specities the routing of the HDMI HDMI audio signal out of this receiver Audio amp or through to a TV When THROUGH is selected no sound is output from this receiver A DELAY This feature automatically Auto corrects the audio to video delay delay between compone
91. 7 2078 2080 Regent 20 4 Rio 2087 Rowa 2071 Samsung 2009 2011 2015 2031 2044 2068 Sansui 2066 Sanyo 2066 2083 Sharp 2035 Sherwood 2063 Shinsonic 2086 Sonic Blue 2087 Sony 2003 2004 2010 2012 2027 2046 2047 2048 Sungale 2054 Superscan 2067 Sylvania 2023 2067 2091 Symphonic 2023 Teac 2070 Technics 2068 Theta Digital 2078 Toshiba 2001 2006 2049 2066 2076 Trutech 2000 Urban Concepts 2076 US Logic 2086 Venturer 2070 Xbox 2077 Yamaha 2005 2068 Zenith 2019 2076 2082 2087 f operations are not possible using the preset codes below you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the DVD DVR BDR HDR Pioneer 2159 2160 Denon 2147 2148 2149 Hitachi 2144 2145 2146 JVC 2127 2128 2130 2131 2132 2133 DVR BDR HDR Kenwood 2044 LG 2123 2124 Marantz 2139 2140 Mitsubishi 2137 2138 Onkyo 2126 Panasonic 2114 2115 2116 Philips 2117 Samsung 2119 Sharp 2141 2142 2143 Sony 2120 2121 2122 2129 Toshiba 2125 2099 Yamaha 2134 2135 2136 f operations are not possible using the preset codes below you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the DVD BD Pioneer 2103 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 Panasonic 2100 2106 Sharp 2104 2112 Sony 2105 2108 2109 2110 2113 Toshiba 2111 Additional information CH VCR Pioneer 1035 ABS 1017 Adve
92. 7 e Setup microphone cable 5 m 16 4 ft e Omni directional remote control CU RF100 e RF adapter e IR blaster cable x2 e AA LR6 dry cell batteries x4 e AM loop antenna e FM wire antenna e iPod cable e Power cord e Warranty card e These operating instructions In case of SC 35 e Setup microphone cable 5 m 16 4 ft e Remote control unit e AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries to confirm system operation x2 e AM loop antenna e FM wire antenna e iPod cable e Power cord e Warranty card e These operating instructions Installing the receiver e When installing this unit make sure to put it on a level and stable surface Don t install it on the following places onacolor IV the screen may distort near a cassette deck or close to a device that gives off a magnetic field This may interfere with the sound in direct sunlight in damp or wet areas in extremely hot or cold areas in places where there is vibration or other movement in places that are very dusty in places that have hot fumes or oils Such as a kitchen e Do not touch this receiver s bottom panel while the power is on or just after it is turned off The bottom panel becomes hot when the power is on or right after it is turned off and could cause burns Loading the batteries In case of SC 37 1 In case of SC 35 The batteries included with the unit are to check initial oper
93. AIR feature is selected automatically see Listening in stereo on page 61 for more on this e When listening to XM Radio the XM HD Surround feature is selected automatically see Using XM HD Surround on page 54 for more on this Note ALC In the Auto level control ALC mode this receiver equalizes playback sound levels OPTIMUM SURR SC 37 only In the Optimum Surround mode this receiver automatically optimizes sound balance in each scene based on actually set volume The sound balancer controls three major theater sound elements dialogue bass and surround with original algorithm Tip e When ALC is selected the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 76 Listening in surround sound Using this receiver you can listen to any source in surround sound However the options available will depend on your speaker setup and the type of source you re listening to Standard surround sound The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo and multichannel sources 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode 2 While listening to a source press STANDARD STANDARD SURROUND If necessary press repeatedly to select a listening mode e Ifthe source is Dolby Digital DTS or Dolby Surround encoded the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display With two channel sources you can select from OO Pr
94. AL Move the test tone manually from speaker to speaker and adjust individual channel levels Note e AUTO Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves from speaker to speaker automatically 3 Confirm your selected setup option The test tones will start after you press ENTER 4 Adjust the level of each channel using If you selected MANUAL use f to switch speakers The AUTO setup will output test tones in the order shown on screen Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is emitted 5 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu tip e You can change the channel levels by set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press CH LEVEL and then using on the remote control Speaker Distance For good sound depth and separation from your system you need to specify the distance of your speakers from the listening position The receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective surround sound 1 Select Speaker Distance from the Manual SP Setup menu 2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 1 2 inch Increments 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu C tip e For best surround sound make sure the surround back speakers are the same distance from the listening position 1 If you selected ZONE 2 or Front Bi Amp in Speaker syste
95. CACC menu Making receiver settings from the Advanced IW CCCI oara aa geese aA 104 Automati MEACCCEXDCUD 5 5 6 0 46 2 echt wear 104 Marua ViCAGC C S61 0s cca seh oben a aa ets 106 IRIE CRERWI OIE VEN ak tos Baie cele dete as te aie at 107 FING SOSAKEr DISTANCES ici andes amp rand hana eee 107 SHANI OV AV Scene esate el hs EY Ook Ok le 107 ACOUSTICCalibralion EV AGUSl sc imersa neita 108 Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional ia tasima 108 PRECISION DISTANCES C r ON aunt dt tx 6 ah ik teat 110 Chec King MCAC Daler ripi iaire Seca b mab Geared 110 Speak EMN eS sic even cee 2S See Bee ee 111 Channel kevel Srass charade acta axe Ay es chate a ae as 111 Speaker Distante 442k eet EERE Hoehne 111 tandin VV eaa a suai a 111 PCOUSIC Cal EO 4 ains tee a oe aaa A EA 111 SOU D AVGE 7 Oa tated election a teates 111 OUOUMIVIC AGC Cae nbs ain uae ae el a E eee 112 DaMan e gricigiitere see mar eee ee ae ee een meres 112 Renaming MUACGS DISSES 2365 ee ottawa 112 Copying MCACT prosetdata rek riai 113 Cearnog MCACE DCSE reida ee eae es 113 12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus Making receiver settings from the System Setup MEMU raa a aa Na peeled 114 Mangal SReakerSetUDs lt lt 2 6 saaa eaaa ai 114 PEAKE SVS EMS aaa aaa ee douse Gens 115 Pear ko CUN eaaa a E a 115 Cane UMeVell e aeaa aa a a Toa i 116 Soe enD SAN e rduan aeaa ea 116 KAS WNYC a iare a aren oeae a ei ara ares i 117 HAA AUGO eM raan ae EAE ora 117 NEIWOTK O CLUS Ie e aaa N 117
96. CK FH FW FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK 0000 O O O O10 O OO O O OARA 000 SUBWOOFER 9000 uv o ANTENNA SURROUND BACK SURROUND L Single CENTER SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring oo000 oo0000 AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 2 SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL OUTPUT5V OUTPUT VOIR LE MODE 150 mA MAX 2V D EMPLOI TOTAL Oo 2 150 mA MAX CAUTION SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 69 160 EXTENSION ATTENTION ENCEINTE D IMPEDANCE DE 62 160 Connecting your equipment 03 Note e The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver s different input terminals Refer to 7he Inout Setup menu on page 45 to change the assignments if other connections are used Input Terminals Input function Digital HDMI Component DVD COAX 1 IN 1 BD BD TV SAT OPT 1 DVR BDR OPT 2 IN 2 VIDEO OPT 3 IN 3 HDMI 1 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 5 front panel CD COAX 2 CD R TAPE COAX 32 a SC 37 only e SC 35 only The CU RF100 omni directional remote control separately sold can be connected to the RS 232C and EXTENSION terminals Using the CU RF100 lets you display the receiver s display information on the remote control display in your hands and operate it without worrying about obstacles or the direction in which the remote control is pointing RS 232C OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MA
97. COAX 2 COAX 3 o a With Control with HDMI set to ON assignments cannot be made see Control with HDMI function on page 72 b SC 37 only c SC 35 only d SC 37 only assignment possible for the SC 35 1 Devices connected to 12 volt triggers can be associated with HDMI OUT switching For details see HDM Setup on page 78 En Basic playback Chapter 5 Basic playback Q Important e The procedure for setting the receiver operation mode differs for the remote controls included with the SC 37 and SC 35 For the SC 37 s remote control set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER For the SC 35 s remote control press the IRECEIVER button When set the remote control to the receiver operation mode is indicated in these instructions use the respective procedure described above Playing a source Here are the basic instructions for playing a source such as a DVD disc with your home theater system 1 Switch on your system components and receiver Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver 2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode 3 Select the input function you want to play You can use the input function buttons on the remote control INPUT SELECT or the front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial 4 Press AUTO ALC DIRECT AUTO SURR ALC STREAM DIRECT to select AUTO SURROUND and start playback of the source If you re playing a Dolby Dig
98. DE above 5 Use f to select acommand in the sequence then press ENTER If this is the first command in the sequence select 1st CODE Otherwise simply choose the next command in the sequence PRESS KEY flashes after you press ENTER 6 If necessary press the input function button for the component whose command you want to input This is only necessary if the command is for a new component input function 7 Select the button for the command you want to input The following remote control commands can be selected RECEIVER MAIN SOURCE ONE2 3 Covet NET RADIO C E re org OPTION USB ios nea C MULTICH Gros Cin Wo a INPUT SELECT LIGHT eX OE TV CONTROL VIDEO PARAMETER TOOLS PARAMETER UET TUNE 4 GUIDE MENU iPod CTRL TUNE PTY SEARCH STATUS PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL THX MPX PQLS_ MEMORY AUTO ALC DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR SIGNALSEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO UL L A ATT SBch MCACC INFO 6 HDMI OUT 9 D ACCESS CLASS C Co fre TV CONTROL o we AUDIO e You don t need to program the receiver to switch on or off This is done automatically m VIDEO With Pioneer components you don t need to e program the power to switch off in a shutdown sequence except DVD recorders These take priority in multi operations not shutdown 1 You can t use direct function TUNER HMG NET RADIIO ADAPTER and iPod USB 2
99. DMI functions can be used see Control with HDMI function on page 72 HDMI DVI compatible Other HDMI DVI Blu ray disc player equipped component HDMI DVI compatible monitor Select one DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL R ANALOG L Qo Fl This connection is required in order to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver OUT1 ouT2 BD IN IN IN IN LAN 10 100 ADAPTEPORT AELE K n 4 a a ae 4 outu m ES e F VF GS Ga GS i COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL as OPTICAL As ASSIGNABLE N EI OVD maa cos avam c lt oeoo oeoc o nern ZONE2 ZONES DvD TV SAT VIREO DVR BDR PHONO cp Petals INK VIDEO IN ouT IN NT G CEI AC ae SIGNAL GND ANTEN FRONT HEIGHT WIDE EJ SURROUND BACK SURROUND 0 R L R L Single L SPEAKERS FED GED PE SPD a SED E GB E E E ER Er K nl B H i A is i ig Ls A y QD yA of Ly A r NA 1 eA 9 a Ft i a LP LP ae ee ara n Class 2 Wiring AMLOOP FMUNBAL75 Q J PRE Z gt Y SELECTABLE 12V SEE INSTRUCTION TRIGGER MANUAL SELECTABLE r O a K sE ourpursv uae PORTE MODE ost as ot Raw 150 mA MAX 150 mA MAX CL MAMAN CAUTION SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 69 169 CU RF100 ATTENTION ENCEINTE D IMPEDANCE DE
100. DO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DTS Surround Neo 6 CINEMA Neo 6 CINEMA Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback Surround Back speaker s Not connected Dolby Digital Surround DO Pro Logic Il MOVIE Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT stereo PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT DVD A sources As above As above SACD sources As above As above OO Pro Logic Il MOVIE DTS Surround Neo 6 CINEMA Neo 6 CINEMA Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback Multichannel signal formats Input signal format Surround Back speaker s Connected Dolby Digital EX 6 1 channel flagged Auto Surround ALC Dolby Digital EX OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT stereo PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT DVD A sources As above As above SACD sources As above As above PURE DIRECT DIRECT Dolby Digital EX OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DTS ES 6 1 channel sources 6 1 channel flagged DTS ES Matrix Discrete DTS ES Matrix Discrete DTS sources 5 1 channel encoding Straight decoding Straight decoding DTS HD sources As above As above Other 5 1 6 1 7 1 channel sources Surround Back speaker s Not connected DVD A sources Multi ch PCM As above Straight decoding As above Straight decoding SACD sources 5 1 channel encoding As above As above Othe
101. Deck Pioneer 5058 5059 5070 Digital Tape Pioneer 5069 MD Pioneer 5068 Dishpro 6002 6089 Echostar 6002 6089 6003 Expressvu 6002 Hughes Network Systems 6113 6114 6115 6116 Director 6073 Emerson 6122 Fosgate 60 2 General Instrument 6073 6072 6122 Homecast 6024 i3 Micro 6077 Insight 6074 6073 6029 Jebsee 6122 Jerrold 6073 6072 6122 Knology 6029 Macab 6040 Mediacom 6074 6029 Memorex 6112 Cisco 6029 6083 Comcast 6074 6029 6083 6076 Cox 6074 6029 Digeo 6081 6058 Homecast 6024 Insight 6074 6029 Knology 6029 Hitachi 5042 Kenwood 5020 5021 5031 Luxman 5049 Marantz 5033 Onkyo 5017 5018 5030 5050 Panasonic 5036 Philips 5054 JVC 6003 Motorola 6032 Philips 6113 6114 Proscan 6110 Samsung 6114 Motorola 6074 6073 6072 6029 6122 6094 MTS 6094 Myrio 6077 6078 Noos 6040 Pace 6074 6029 6028 6106 6083 Panasonic 6112 6083 Paragon 6112 Penney 6112 Philips 6012 Pulsar 6112 Quasar 6112 Regal 6072 Rogers 6029 Runco 6112 Mediacom 6074 6029 Motorola 6074 6081 Myrio 6078 Pace 6029 Panasonic 6083 Rogers 6029 Scientific Atlanta 6029 Philips 5022 5032 5044 RCA 5013 5029 Roadstar 5052 Sharp 5051 Sony 5012 5023 5026 5027 5028 5039 TEAC 5015 5016 5034 5035 5037 Yamaha 5055 Sonicview 6055 6107 Sony 6062 Star Choice 6032 Tivo 6113 6114 6115 6116 Samsung 6095 Scientific Atlanta 6029 6028 6027 6112 Se
102. ER After pressing ENTER the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the XM channel 4 Tip e You can also press MEMORY during reception display to save the information of up to five songs See Using the XM Menu below to recall this information Listening to channel presets 1 Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel is stored Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G 2 Press to select the channel preset you want e You can also use the number buttons on the remote control to recall the channel preset Note Using the XM Menu The XM Menu provides additional XM Radio features 1 Press TOP MENU 2 Use f to select a menu item then press ENTER Choose from the following menu items e Channel Skip Add Use and ENTER to select channels you would like to remove restore from to the channel guide e Antenna Aiming Check the strength of satellite and terrestrial reception e Memory Recall Use to browse your saved song information see Jip above 3 When you re finished press TOP MENU to return to the reception display Listening to SIRIUS Radio For details on SIRIUS Radio see About S R US and XM on page 137 1 SC 37 only Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE 2 Press OPTION 1 SC 37 SIRIUS SC 35 to switch to the SIRIUS input For best reception you may need to move the SiriusConnect tuner antenna near a wi
103. FF ED Additional information Symptom Remedy Can t record video e Check that the source is not copy protected e The video converter is not available when making recordings Check that the same type of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source the one you want to record to this receiver Noisy intermittent or distorted Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal during scanning for example or the picture video quality may just be poor with some video game units for example The picture quality may also depend on the settings etc of your display device Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection component or composite then start playback again Video signals are not output e When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the component terminal trom the component terminal and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal the video signals may not be output to the monitor connected to the component terminal If this happens do the following Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal Change the VIDEO PARAMETER menu RES setting Video signals from the HDMI terminal cannot be output to the component terminals Input the video signals from the player or other source to the composite or component terminals When using the component terminal assign i
104. Front Bi amping connection High quality Surround e 5 1 channel surround system amp ZONE 2 connection Multi Zone s 3 Connecting the speakers Placing the speakers page 23 e Connecting the speakers page 24 Installing your speaker system page 25 Bi amping your speakers page 26 s 4 Connecting the components e About the audio connection page 27 e About the video converter page 27 e Connecting your TV and playback components page 29 Connecting AM FM antennas page 36 Plugging in the receiver page 42 gt 5 Power On e 6 Changing the OSD display language OSD Language page 43 J 7 MCACC speaker settings e Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC page 48 a 8 The Input Setup menu page 45 When using connections other than the recommended connections P 9 Basic playback page 47 g 10 Switching the HDMI output page 81 a 11 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired e Using the various listening modes Better sound using Phase Control page 62 Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control SC 37 only page 63 Measuring the all EQ type SYMMETRY ALL CH ADJ FRONT ALIGN page 104 Changing the channel level while listening Zip on page 116 Switching on off the Acoustic Calibration EQ Sound retriever or Dialog Enhancement page 76 Setting the PQLS function page 75 Setting the Audio options Tone Loudness or Sound de
105. HX is a trademark of THX Ltd which may be registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved 1 Select Auto MCACC from the Advanced MCACC menu then press ENTER If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed refer to Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu above The Advanced MCACC menu 2 Select the parameters you want to set Use f to select the item then use to set e Auto MCACC The default is ALL recommended but you can limit the system calibration to only one setting to save time if you want EQ Type only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro amp S Wave This determines how the frequency balance is adjusted After a single calibration is performed each of the following three correction curves can be stored separately in the MCACC memory SYMMETRY implements symmetric correction for each pair of left and right speakers to flatten the frequency amplitude characteristics ALL CH ADJ is a flat setting where all the speakers are set individually so no special weighting is given to any one channel FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings no equalization is applied to the front left and right channels e THX Speaker 0n y available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is ALL or Speaker Setting Select YES if you are using THX speakers set all speakers to SMALL otherwise leave it set to NO e STAND WAVE Multi Point
106. I screen looks page 120 e RF Remote Setup SC 37 only Allows the CU RF100 to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode page 120 EXTENSION Setup SC 35 only Allows the CU RF100 to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode page 120 Multi Ch In Setup Specifies the optional settings for a multi channel input page 120 Pairing Bluetooth Setup Use to pair a Bluetooth ADAPTER and G uetooth wireless technology device page 58 5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen Volume Setup You can set the maximum volume of this receiver or specify what the volume level will be when the power is turned on 1 Select Volume Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the Power ON Level setting you want The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same level when the receiver s power is turned on e LAST default When the power is turned on the volume is set to the same level as when the power was last turned off e When the power is turned on the volume is set to minimum level e 80 0dB to 12 0dB Specify the volume to be set when the power is turned on in steps of 0 5 dB It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the value specified at Volume Limit setup see below 3 Select the Volume Limit setting you want Use this function to limit the maximum volume The volume cannot be incre
107. IUS radio messages Status messages Antenna Error The SIRIUS antenna is not properly connected Check that the antenna cable is attached securely Additional information Status messages Cause Action Check Sirius Tuner Acquiring Signal Subscription Updating Updating Channels Invalid Channel The SiriusConnect tuner is not properly connected The SIRIUS signal is too weak at the current location Unit is updating subscription Unit is updating the channel information Selected channel is not available does not Check that the 8 pin mini DIN cable and AC Adapter are attached securely Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the SIRIUS antenna to get better signal reception Use the Antenna Aiming option to optimize the antenna position exist Firmware Updating The SiriusConnect tuner s firmware is being updated HOME MEDIA GALLERY SC 37 only Symptoms Cannot access the network Causes The LAN cable is not firmly connected The router is not switched on Internet security software is currently installed in the connected component The audio component on the network which has been switched off is switched on Playback does not start while The component is currently disconnected from Connecting continues to be displayed this receiver or the power supply The PC or Internet radio is not The corresponding IP address is not properly set properly oper
108. MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu e Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the Home Menu 3 Select System Setup from the Home Menu then press ENTER 4 Select the setting you want to adjust e Manual SP Setup Sets the type of connection used for surround back terminals and the size number distance and overall balance of the connected speakers see Manual speaker setup below Input Setup Specifies what you ve connected to the digital HDMI and component video inputs see The Input Setup menu on page 45 e OSD Language he GUI screen s display language can be changed see Changing the OSD display language OSD Language on page 43 e Network Setup Conducts the setup necessary to connect this unit to the network see Network Setup menu on page 117 e Other Setup Makes customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver see he Other Setup menu on page 119 Manual speaker setup This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize the surround sound performance You only need to make these settings once unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers These settings are designed to customize your system but if you re satisfied with the settings made in Automatically conducting op
109. OFF then press ENTER The remote display shows OK to confirm the setting Multi Operation and System Off The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a series of up to 6 commands for the components in your system For example you could turn on your TV turn on your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using only two buttons on the remote control Similar to multi operations System Off allows you to use one button to stop and switch off a series of components in your system at the same time Programming a multi operation or a shutdown sequence Set the remote control operation mode selector switch to RECEIVER when you want to program this receiver s operations to SOURCE when you want to program operations of other components 1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press HOME MENU The remote display shows SETUP MENU 2 Use f to select MULTI OPERATE or SYSTEM OFF from the menu and press ENTER If you selected Multi Operation MULTI OPERATE the remote display prompts you for an input function button If you selected System Off SYSTEM OFF go to step 4 Note 3 Press the input function button for the component that will start the multi operation then press ENTER For example if you want to start the sequence by switching on your DVD player press DVD 4 Use f to select EDIT CODE then press ENTER To erase any previously stored multi operations or shutdown sequences select CLEAR CO
110. Pioneer Operating Instructions MO ELITE audio video multi channel receiver SC 6 5 IMPORTANT A The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol CAUTION within an equilateral triangle is intended to TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the alert the user to the presence of uninsulated SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR presence of important operating and dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons SERVICE PERSONNEL BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance D3 4 2 1 1_A1_En IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A groundi
111. Playing back your TaVonte songs riai aaa aai 67 Advanced operations for Internet radio eee eae 67 SAVING MTENMet Fao Sta LlON AE sacs chicas 67 Retrieving saved Internet radio stationS 67 CHECKING BDO UT TAG AC COUNTS aariaa Sie a Goes 68 ADOUT DEIWOFMDIAVOOCK wwe eta ire htb de eared 68 Windows Media PIAVel e tse tadeed ae ee haw ade 68 WVISICOW S MGIT ORV e Aah eA o0 8 gee feu Ae i 68 BEMA ms sy ats Yes to Sadia he theta ees Sicha dean Shas ANE aes 68 Content playable over a network ee eee eens 68 About playback behavior over a network 0 69 SOT CEC ee aaa a de irae tard aera cae 69 Anoura ne TIE TONGS eaaa araa oak wut are as 70 GIOSS Ay eect PE tics eG ares Maa ee an ode Sree See 71 08 Control with HDMI function Making Control with HDMI connections HOMES a Stour eet a ane S Aharae ard a aveace ards Betore USING SYNCMPONIZAN ON ansaa Ekrene Ea About synchronized operon essa aaraa aA About connections with a product of a different brand that supports the Control with HDMI function Senge POLS UNCON ehir e Tenir N Cautions on the Control with HDMI function 09 Using other functions Dening The AUCIOODUONS rera ra a esa cne SEMA The VICE ODLIONS sa eine Sate ad ae ee cae Switching the speaker terminalS cece ee eens sig tae MYLEZONE CONTO S anaa aA axes Making an audio or avideo recording sinasara Reducing the level of an analog signal HUSNES LED UM O sie 2 5 da
112. S 232C and CU RF100 terminals SC 37 EXTENSION terminals SC 35 the CU RF100 omni directional remote control can be used for RF two way communications with the receiver With RF two way communications the information of the receiver s display can be displayed on the remote control in your hands and the remote control can be operated without worrying about obstacles or the direction in which the remote control iS pointing For details see Flow for operating the receiver with RF two way communications SC 37 only below Note Flow for operating the receiver with RF two way communications SC 37 only This remote control unit is set for operations using infrared signals upon shipment from the factory To set it for RF operations take the steps below 1 Connecting the RF adapter to the RS 232C and CU RF100 terminals e Connecting the RF adapter SC 37 only on page 21 g 2 Setting the RF Remote Setup to ON e RF Remote Setup SC 387 only on page 120 3 Pairing the RF adapter and remote control e Pairing the RF adapter and remote control on page 92 4 4 Setting RECEIVER MAIN to RF MODE for the remote control unit s IR RF SELECT setting e Operating this receiver by RF communications on page 92 1 The RF adapter and CU RF100 omni directional remote control are included with the SC 37 sold separately with the SC 35 2 The maximum line of sight distance for RF two way communications is
113. SION Address 1925 E DOMINGUEZ ST LONG BEACH CA 90810 1003 U S A Phone 1 800 421 1404 URL htto www pioneerelectronics com D8 10 4 _C1_En NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Information to User Alterations or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user s right to operate the equipment D8 10 2_A1_En CAUTION This product satisties FCC regulations when shielde
114. STAND WAVE Multi Point setup in step 2 you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at your main listening position 9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Advanced MCACC menu reappears automatically The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the Manual MCACC setup menu starting below or Manual SP Setup menu starting on page 114 You can also choose to view the settings by selecting individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check screen see Checking MCACC Data on page 110 Press RETURN after you have finished checking each screen When you re finished select RETURN to go back to the Home Menu Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup Note Manual MCACC setup You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup menu to make detailed adjustments when you re more familiar with the system Before making these settings you should have already completed Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 You only need to make these settings once unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers A caution e The test tones used in the Manual MCACC setup are output at high volume Q Important e Press the MCACC button wh
115. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped D3 7 13 69_En WARNING To prevent a fire hazard do not place any naked flame sources such as a lighted candle on the equipment D3 4 2 1 7a_A1_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity 5 C to 35 C 41 F to 95 F less than 85 RH cooling vents not blocked Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight or strong artificial light D3 4 2 1 7c _A1_En Caution To prevent fire hazard the Class 2 Wiring Cable should be used for connection with speaker and should be routed away from hazards to avoid damage to the insulation of the cable D3 7 13 67 _A1_En FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Product Name AUDIO VIDEO MULTI CHANNEL RECEIVER Model Number SC 37 SC 35 Responsible Party Name PIONEER ELECTRONICS USA INC SERVICE SUPPORT DIVI
116. Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly and without distortion Once you have established a comfortable sound level e Set the dial and leave it there Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent hearing damage or loss in the future After all we want you listening for a lifetime We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Used wisely your new sound equipment will provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment Since hearing damage from loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late this manufacturer and the Electronic Industries Association s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid prolonged exposure to excessive noise This list of sound levels is included for your protection Decibel Level Example 30 Quiet library soft whispers 40 Living room refrigerator bedroom away from traffic 50 Light traffic normal conversation quiet office 60 Air conditioner at 20 feet sewing machine 70 Vacuum cleaner hair dryer noisy restaurant 80 Average city traffic garbage disposals alarm clock at two feet THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE 90 Subway motorcycle truck traffic lawn mower 100 Garbage truck chain saw pneumatic drill 120 Rock band concert in front of speakers thunderclap 140 Gunshot blast jet plane 180 Rocket launching pad formation courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation 5 S001_A1_En EE Additional inform
117. T Plays back sound from the source with the least modification next to PURE DIRECT With DIRECT the only modifications added to PURE DIRECT playback are calibration of the sound field by the MCACC system and the Phase Control effect PURE DIRECT Plays back unmodified sound from source with only minimal digital treatment No sound is output from the Speaker B in this mode OPTIMUM SURR SC 37 only Listening in Optimum Surround mode page 59 Selecting MCACC presets e Default setting MEMORY 1 If you have calibrated your system for different listening positions you can switch between settings to Suit the kind of source you re listening to and where you re sitting for example watching movies from a sofa or playing a video game close to the TV Note 1 These settings have no effect when headphones are connected e You can also press to select the MCACC preset 06 Listening to your system 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode 2 While listening to a source press MCACC Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets See Data Management on page 112 to check and manage your current settings Choosing the input signal On this receiver it is possible to switch the input signals for the different inputs as described below 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode 2 Press SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal corresponding to the source component Each p
118. TVs may interfere with the operation of the microphone If this seems to be happening switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup Note The Input Setup menu You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didn t hook up your digital equipment according to the default settings see nout function default and possible settings on page 46 In this case you need to tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the components you ve connected 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu 2 Select System Setup from the Home Menu 3 Select Input Setup from the System Setup menu 4 System Setup AV RECEIVER a Manual SP Setup c OSD Language d Network Setup e Other Setup 4b Input Setup A V RECEIVER Input DVD gt Input Name o Rename Input Skip Digital In HDMI Input Component In 3 12V Trigger1 12V Trigger2 Return gt 9 Exit Finish amp 4 Select the input function that you want to set up The default names correspond with the names next to the terminals on the rear panel such as DVD or VIDEO which in turn correspond with the names on the remote control 5 Select the input s
119. US Menu on page 55 5 It s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the GUI screens You can however use just the front panel display to do everything if you prefer Basic playback 05 Selecting channels and browsing by genre From the SIRIUS Channel Guide you can browse SIRIUS Radio channels in the order that they appear or you can narrow your channel search by genre 1 Press t to enter the SIRIUS Channel Guide navigate through the channels one at time with f J then press ENTER to listen to the SIRIUS radio broadcast e To browse by genre first press CATEGORY use f 4 to select a genre then press ENTER e To cancel and exit any time press RETURN 4 Tip e You can select channels directly by pressing D ACCESS then the three digit channel number e You can press DISP to change SIRIUS Radio information in the front panel display e The currently selected channel is automatically chosen without pressing ENTER after five seconds Saving channel presets This receiver can memorize up to 63 channels stored in seven banks or classes A to G of nine channels each 1 Select the channel you want to memorize See Selecting channels and browsing by genre above 2 Press T EDIT The display shows a blinking memory class 3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes then press to select the channel preset you want You can also use the number buttons to select a preset 4 Pre
120. VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is connected e The video convert function does not work for ZONE 2 Connect the composite video and component video to the same types of jacks for the inputs and outputs 03 Connecting your equipment En MULTI ZONE setup using speaker terminals ZONE 2 You must select ZONE 2 in Speaker system setting on page 115 to use this setup e Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jacks on this receiver You should have a pair of speakers attached to the surround back speaker terminals as shown below Sub zone ZONE 2 Main zone BD IN IN IN H 2 D E Ga E NT VIDEO IABLE d 10 100 XM ADAPTER P IN OUTPUT 5V 100 mA MAX A 5 JOAXIAL ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE IND NA Ng IND NA Ng DvD CD CD R TVSAT DVRIBDR VIDEO Secondary MULTI ZONE setup ZONE 3 e Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 3 OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 3 OUT jack both on this receiver You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration Sub zone ZONE 3 Main zone BD IN IN Il jeans a a a aS aS SS Se COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE Note Connecting to the network through LAN interface By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal you can listen to Internet radio stations
121. W the button will simply switch your main speaker terminal A on or off Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal option e SPP A Sound is output from the A speaker terminals up to 7 channels including surround back channels depending on the source e SPB Sound is output from the two speakers connected to the B speaker terminals Multichannel sources will not be heard SP AB Sound is output from the A speaker terminals up to 5 channels depending on the source the two speakers connected to the B speaker terminals and the subwoofer The sound from the B speaker terminals will be the same as the sound from the A speaker terminals multichannel sources will be downmixed to 2 channels e SPP off No sound is output from the speakers Using the MULTI ZONE controls The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust the sub zone volume and select sources See MULTI ZONE remote controls on page 80 1 Press MULTI ZONE ON OFF on the front panel Each press selects a MULTI ZONE option ZONE 2 ON Selects your primary ZONE 2 sub zone e ZONE 2 amp 3 ON Select both sub zones e ZONE 3 ON Selects your secondary ZONE 3 sub zone e MULTI ZONE OFF Switches the MULTI ZONE feature off The MULTI ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI ZONE control has been switched ON 2 Press MULTI ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the sub zone s you want If you selected ZONE 2 amp 3 ON
122. X C EXTENSION A caution e Before making or changing the connections switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet Plugging in should be the final step Connecting the RF adapter SC 37 only Two way communications between the receiver and remote control are possible by connecting the included RF adapter to the RS 232C and CU RF100 terminals on the receiver For the features of two way communications and detailed usage instructions see Using the RF communications function on page 91 SSE e ele RF adapter 03 Connecting your equipment En C 7 1 channel surround system amp Speaker B Determining the speakers application connection This unit permits you to build various surround systems Speaker System setting Speaker B in accordance with the number of speakers you have e Be sure to connect speakers to the front left and right channels L and R e tis also possible to only connect one of the surround back speakers SB or neither Choose one from Plans A to E below A 9 1 channel surround system Front height Default setting e Speaker System setting Normal SB FH Speaker B With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5 1 channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback of the same sound on the B speakers The same connections also allow for 7 1 channel surround sound in the main zone
123. about 200 preset codes this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only 2 e You can t assign TUNER HMG NET RADIIO ADAPTER and iPod USB e The TV CONTROL buttons TVO TV VOL TV CH MUTE and INPUT can only be learned after the operation selection switch is set to TV 3 Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal 4 e Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart e If the remote display shows MEMORY FULL it means the memory is full See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 85 to erase a programmed button you re not using to free up more memory note that some signals may take more memory than others e Depending on the type of command that has been learned operation may not be possible with RF two way communications In this case operate using IR signal transmission For instructions on switching between the IR and RF modes see Operating other components by RF communications on page 92 2 Use f to select ERASE LEARNING then press ENTER The remote display prompts you for the component corresponding to the button setting to be erased 3 Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased then press ENTER The remote display flashes PRESS KEY 4 Press and hold the button to be era
124. above you can toggle between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 1 e The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 114 However if SPB is selected above no sound is heard from the subwoofer the LFE channel is not downmixed e All speaker systems except Speaker B connections are switched off when headphones are connected 09 Using other functions En e When the receiver is on make sure that any operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and your selected sub zone s show in the display If this is not showing the front panel controls affect the main zone only 3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source for the zone you have selected For example ZONE 2 CD R sends the source connected to the CD R inputs to the primary ZONE 2 sub room e f you select TUNER you can use the tuner controls to select a preset station see Saving station presets on page 52 if you re unsure how to do this 4 When Speaker System is set to ZONE 2 use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume for the sub zone 5 When you re finished press MULTI ZONE CONTROL again to return to the main zone controls You can also press MULTI ZONE ON OFF on the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone s MULTI ZONE remote controls Set the MULTI ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to operate the corresponding zone The following table shows the possible MULTI ZONE remote controls Button Wha
125. ain zone 3 When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen the playback screen reappears automatically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds while the list screen is displayed 4 The URL can also be entered by connecting a USB keyboard see Connecting a USB device on page 40 Basic playback 05 1 Turn on the computer and launch the Internet browser 2 In the address bar on the browser enter the IP address assigned to this receiver For example if the IP address of this receiver is 192 168 0 2 enter http 192 168 0 2 When the connection is made with the receiver a Top Menu will be displayed e This receiver s IP address can be found in the IP address Proxy menu page 117 3 Select Internet Radio Setting The following programming screen will be shown on the browser Pioneer Top Menu Internet Radio Setting Update Connection OK Update Update Update Update RL AOI Update Update e ENKA L http www zyxzyx com 6000 Update Title J POP URL http www xxxxxxx net 9500 Ti 4 Enter the title and URL of the Internet radio station you wish to program then press Update The entered information will be transmitted to the receiver The connection to the URL designated from the computer will be confirmed If connection is successful Connection OK will be displayed on screen and the selected Internet radio station wi
126. ally exits the operation Operating multiple receivers The remote control included with this receiver can be used to operate up to three other receivers of the same model as this receiver in addition to this receiver The receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the preset code to set the remote control setting e Set the remote modes on the receivers before using this function see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 119 1 Check that the remote control s MULTI ZONE selector switch is set to MAIN and that the operation selector switch is set to RECEIVER 2 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press HOME MENU The remote display shows SETUP MENU 3 Use f to select CHANGE RC MODE then press ENTER 4 Use t J to select the remote mode RC MODE 1 to 4can be selected 5 Press ENTER to set the remote mode The selected mode flashes for 3 seconds To operate another receiver start over from step 1 to input its preset code Setting the remote to control other components Most components can be assigned to one of the input function buttons such as DVD or CD using the component s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote However there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using If you can t find a preset code that matches the component y
127. and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Xiph org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE ED Additional information En Auto Surround ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats depending on the Stream Direct mode see Using Stream Direct on page 62 you have selected Stereo 2 channel signal formats Input signal format Surround Back speaker s Connected Auto Surround ALC DIRECT PURE DIRECT Dolby Digital Surround
128. aneously from the front height front wide speaker B and surround back speakers Output speakers are different depending on the input signal or listening mode Other speaker connections e Your favorite speaker connections can be selected even if you have fewer than 5 1 speakers except front left right speakers e When not connecting a subwoofer connect speakers with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the front channel The subwoofer s low frequency component is played from the front speakers so the speakers could be damaged e After connecting be sure to conduct the Full Auto MCACC speaker environment setting procedure See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 Placing the speakers Refer to the chart below for placement of the speakers you intend to connect Place the surround speakers at 120 from the center If you 1 use the surround back speaker and 2 don t use the front height speakers front wide speakers we recommend placing the surround speaker right beside you If you intend to connect only one surround back speaker place it directly behind you Place the left and right front height speakers at least one meter 3 3 ft directly above the left and right front speakers THX speaker system setup If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer if your Subwoofer has one or switch the filter position to THX on you
129. annels directly by pressing D ACCESS then the three digit channel number e You can press DISP to change XM Radio information in the front panel display 1 You can check the strength of reception in Using the XM Menu on page 54 2 It s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the GUI screens You can however use just the front panel display to do everything if you prefer 3 Select 0 RADIO ID from the GUI to check the Radio ID of the XM Mini Tuner 05 Basic playback En e he currently selected channel is automatically chosen without pressing ENTER after five seconds Using XM HD Surround XM HD Surround uses Neural Surround technologies to achieve optimal surround sound from XM radio XM HD Surround Sound is available on select XM channels only e While listening to XM Radio press AUTO ALC DIRECT for XM HD Surround listening XM HD Surround can be selected also with STANDARD Saving channel presets This receiver can memorize up to 63 channels stored in seven banks or classes A to G of 9 channels each 1 Select the channel you want to memorize See Selecting channels and browsing by genre on page 53 2 Press T EDIT The display shows a blinking memory class 3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes then press to select the channel preset you want You can also use the number buttons to select a preset e The default for all presets is XM1 4 Press ENT
130. arts with the playback screen being displayed for the selected item To return to the list screen press RETURN Only audio Tiles with the 4a mark can be played In case of the folders with the amp mark use and ENTER to select the desired folder and audio files 5 Repeat step 4 to play back the desired song For detailed operating instructions refer to the section shown below e Internet radio stations See Listening to nternet radio stations on page 66 Rhapsody See Listening to Rhapsody on page 66 e Sirius See Listening to Sirius Internet Radio on page 67 e Neural Music Direct See Listening to Neural Music Direct on page 67 e Server See Playing back audio files stored on components on the network below Playing back audio files stored on components on the network You can perform the following operations with the remote control of this receiver Note that some buttons are not available for operation depending on the category currently being played back e Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE then press HMG to switch the remote control to the HOME MEDIA GALLERY operation mode SOURCE 1 When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen the playback screen reappears automatically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds while the list screen is displayed 07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs SC 37 only En
131. ase Check that the positive negative speaker terminals on the correctly but the playback receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers see Connecting the sound is odd speakers on page 24 Additional information Symptom The PHASE CONTROL feature doesn t seem to have an audible effect SC 37 only Full Band Phase Control cannot be selected Noise or hum can be heard even when there is no sound being input Can t select some Input functions by the INPUT SELECTOR on the front panel or the INPUT SELECT button on the remote control There seems to be atime lag between the speakers and the output of the subwoofer The maximum volume available Shown in the front panel display is lower than the 12dB maximum Remedy e f applicable check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off or the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer set it to 0 or depending on the subwoofer the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound e Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all soeakers see Speaker Distance on page 116 e Perform Full Auto MCACC measurements see Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 Full Band Phase Control automatically turns on once measurements are completed e Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same
132. ased above the level set here even by operating MASTER VOLUME button or the dial on the front panel e OFF default The maximum volume is not limited e 20 0dB 10 0dB 0 0dB The maximum volume is limited to the value set here 4 Select the Mute Level setting you want This sets how much the volume is to be turned down when MUTE is pressed e FULL default No sound e 40 0dB 20 0dB The volume will be turned down to the level specified here 5 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu Remote Control Mode Setup e Default setting 1 This sets this receiver s remote control mode to prevent erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver are being used 1 Select Remote Control Mode Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want 3 Select OK to change the remote control mode 4 Follow the instructions on the screen to change the remote control s setting See Operating multiple receivers on page 84 SC 37 page 96 SC 35 5 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu gt The System Setup and Other Setup menus En Flicker Reduction Setup e Default setting OFF The GUI screen s resolution can be increased If you feel the GUI screen is hard to see try changing this setting Note that the resolution in this setting only affects the GUI screen it has no influence on
133. at the speaker hasn t been set to NO see Speaker Setting on page 115 e The channel may not be recorded in the source By using one of the advanced effect listening modes you may be able to create the missing channel see Listening in surround sound on page 59 Sound is produced trom e Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on page 62 analog components but not e Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected from digital ones DVD LD to see The Input Setup menu on page 45 CD ROM etc e Check the digital output settings on the source component e f the source component has a digital volume control make sure this is not turned down e Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected Select any other input function No sound is outputoranoiseis Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital DTS discs output when Dolby Digital DTS e Check the digital output settings of your DVD player Make sure that the DTS signal output is set software is played back to On e If the source component has a digital volume control make sure this is not turned down No sound when using the e If the HDMI input function is selected sound is muted until exiting the Home Menu Home Menu Other audio problems Symptom Remedy Broadcast stations cannot be forFM broadcasts selected automatically or e Fully extend the FM
134. ated The audio files stored on components on the network such as a PC cannot be played back The IP address is being automatically configured Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 is not currently installed on your PC Audio files were recorded in formats other than MP3 WAV LPCM only MPEG 4 AAC FLAC and WMA Audio files recorded in MPEG 4 AAC or FLAC are being played back on Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 The component connected to the network is not properly operated The component connected to the network does not permit file sharing The folder stored on the component connected to the network has been deleted or damaged Wait until the channel subscription has been updated Wait until the channel information has been updated Select another channel Wait for updating to finish Remedies Firmly connect the LAN cable page 38 Switch on the router There are cases where a component with Internet security software installed cannot be accessed Switch on the audio component on the network before switching on this receiver Check whether the component is properly connected to this receiver or the power supply Switch on the built in DHCP server function of your router or set up the network manually according to your network environment page 117 The automatic configuration process takes time Please wait Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media P
135. ation En Additional information CH To register your product find the nearest authorized service location to purchase replacement parts operating instructions or accessories please go to one of following URLs Pour enregistrer votre produit trouver le service apr s vente agree le plus proche et pour acheter des pieces de rechange des modes d emploi ou des accessoires reportez vous aux URL suivantes In the USA Aux Etats Unis http www pioneerelectronics com In Canada Aux Canada http www pioneerelectronics ca S018 _B1_EnFr Register Your Product on http www pioneerelectronics com US http www pioneerelectronics ca Canada PIONEER CORPORATION 1 1 Shin ogura Saiwai ku Kawasaki shi Kanagawa 212 0031 Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS USA INC P O BOX 1540 Long Beach California 90801 1540 U S A TEL 800 421 1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA INC 300 Allstate Parkway Markham Ontario L3R OP2 Canada TEL 1 877 283 5901 905 479 4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087 Keetberglaan 1 B 9120 Melsele Belgium TEL 03 570 05 11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE LTD 253 Alexandra Road 04 01 Singapore 159936 TEL 65 6472 7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 178 184 Boundary Road Braeside Victoria 3195 Australia TEL 03 9586 6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S A DE C V Blvd Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col Lomas de Chapultepec Mexico D F 11000 TEL 55 9178 4270 K002_B1_En
136. ation process http www radio pioneer com Access the above site and use the access code in step 3 to perform user registration following the instructions on the screen 5 Register the desired broadcast stations as your favorites following the instructions on the computer s screen Both broadcast stations not on the vluner list and stations on the vluner list can be registered In this case they are registered on the receiver as favorite broadcast stations and can be played Listening to Rhapsody Rhapsody is a paid digital music broadcast service provided by RealNetworks Rhapsody offers 30 day free trial Access the website in order to set up atrial account http www rhapsody com pioneer signup e You must have a registered account in order to listen to songs using Rhapsody For details see Checking about the Accounts on page 68 e As of April 2010 the Rhapsody service is only offered in the United States e Some functions may be changed at Rhapsody s discretion 1 e To listen to Internet radio stations you must have high speed broadband Internet access With a 56 K or ISDN modem you may not enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio e The port number varies depending on the Internet radio station Check the firewall settings e A list of Internet radio stations provided by the vluner database service is subject to change or deletion without notice due to various reasons e Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted depe
137. ations they may not last over a long period We recommend using alkaline batteries that have a longer life QSs A caution Incorrect use of batteries may result in Such hazards as leakage and bursting Observe the following precautions e Never use new and old batteries together e Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages Do not use different batteries together e When disposing of used batteries please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction s rules that apply in your country or area e WARNING Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place such as inside a car or near a heater This can cause batteries to leak overheat explode or catch fire It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries Before you start Operating range of remote control unit The remote control may not work properly if e There are obstacles between the remote control and the receiver s remote sensor e Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the remote Sensor e The receiver is located near a device that is emitting infrared rays e The receiver is operated simultaneously with another infrared remote control unit 5 ES a 4 Tip 7 m 23 ft e By connecting an RF adapter to the R
138. atteries on page 10 e Be sure to operate within 7 m 23 feet and a 30 angle of the remote sensor on the front panel see Operating range of remote control unit on page 11 e Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control e Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor e Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jacks see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit s sensor on page 41 SC 37 only Input does not e Sirius and XM operations can no longer be performed if other preset codes are assigned to the switch to Sirius or XM when OPTION 1 Sirius or OPTION 2 XM button In this case reset the OPTION 1 or OPTION 2 button OPTION 1 or OPTION 2 button see Resetting the input assignment of one of the input function buttons on page 86 is pressed SC 37 only Receiver or other There may be radio interference with other devices Try increasing the distance from microwave components cannot be ovens devices on a wireless LAN other wireless devices etc see Precautions when using the Omni operated by RF two way Directional RF Remote Control on page 94 communications e Try replacing the batteries in the remote control see Loading the batteries on page 10 e f the RF adapter s LED is off the RF adapter may not be properly connected to the receiver Check whether the RF adapter is properly connected to the receiver see Connecting the RF adapter SC
139. b Cr 4 4 4 4 2 2 or 4 2 0 jif Resolution 30 to 8184 pixels vertical 40 to 8184 pixels horizontal J fif 05 Basic playback En Listening to the radio The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic search and manual step tuning functions If you already know the frequency of the station you want see Tuning directly to a station below Once you are tuned to a station you can memorize the frequency for recall later see Saving station presets below for more on how to do this 1 SC 37 only Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE 2 Press TUNER to select the tuner 3 Use BAND to change the band FM or AM if necessary 4 Tune to a station There are three ways to do this Automatic tuning To search for stations in the currently selected band press and hold TUNE f 4 for about a second The receiver will start searching for the next station stopping when it has found one Repeat to search for other stations Manual tuning To change the frequency one step at atime press TUNE J High speed tuning Press and hold TUNE f for high speed tuning Release the button at the frequency you want Improving FM sound If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn t light when tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak press MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode This should improve the sound quality and allow you to enjo
140. c files on an iPhone or other Bluetooth wireless technology device wirelessly e Sound Retriever and Sound Retriever Air The Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to restore sound pressure and smooth jagged artifacts left over after compression Sound Retriever Air compensates for reduced sound quality due to compression when sending B uetooth signals e Easy setup using Advanced MCACC The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup which includes the advanced features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ e Web control The receiver can be operated using a browser from a computer connected on the same LAN as the receiver e RF two way communications function Using the CU RF100 the information shown of the receiver s display can be displayed on the remote control in your hands and you can operate the remote control without worrying about obstacles or the direction in which the remote control is pointing 1 The PQLS functions supported for the different models are as shown below SC 37 PQLS Bit stream PQLS Multi Surround PQLS 2ch Audio SC 35 PQLS Multi Surround PQLS 2ch Audio 2 Home Media Gallery is only supported on the SC 37 3 The AS BT100 is sold separately 4 The CU RF100 is included with the SC 37 sold separately with the SC 35 En Before you start Checking what s in the box Please check that you ve received the following supplied accessories In case of SC 3
141. cate the channels to which digital signals are being input L R Left front Right front channel C Center channel SL SR Left surround Right surround channel LFE Low frequency effects channel the __ indicators light when an LFE signal is being input XL XR Two channels other than the ones above XC Either one channel other than the ones above the mono surround channel or matrix encode flag 3 Digital format indicators Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected OO DIGITAL Lights with Dolby Digital decoding DO DIGITAL PLUS Lights with Dolby Digital Plus decoding DO TrueHD Lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding 11 RECEIVER Switches the remote to control the receiver used to select the white commands Switch to perform operations in the main zone Also use this button to set up Surround sound 12 MASTER VOLUME Use to set the listening volume 13 MUTE Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted adjusting the volume also restores the sound 14 Press to turn on off the illumination for the buttons The way the buttons light can be selected from four modes page 99 9 1011 12 13 14 19 20 DTS Lights with DTS decoding DTS HD Lights with DTS HD decoding 96 24 Lights with DTS 96 24 decoding WMA9 Pro Lights to indicate that a WMA9 Pro signal is being decoded DSD PCM Light during DSD Direct Stream Digital
142. ce of furniture or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables The power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be stepped on A damaged power cord can cause afire or give you an electric shock Check the power cord once in a while If you find it damaged ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company for a replacement e Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this unit e Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than that described below e The receiver should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use e g when on vacation Make sure the blue STANDBY ON light has gone out before unplugging If you have connected speakers with a 6 Q impedance change the impedance setting before turning on the power 1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins You cannot carry out any operations during this process The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF you can skip this process For details about the Control with HDMI feature see Control with HDMI function on page 72 Basic Setup Chapter 4 Basic Setup Q Important e The procedure fo
143. ceiver has been reset to the factory default settings e Note that all settings will be saved even if the receiver is unplugged Default system settings Setting Default Digital Video Conversion ON SPEAKERS A Speaker System Normal SB FH Speaker Setting Front SMALL Center SMALL FH FW SMALL Surr SMALL SB SMALLx2 SW YES Surround Position IN REAR Crossover 80 Hz X Curve OFF THX Audio Setting 4 ft lt DIMMER Brightest Network Standby OFF Inputs See nput function default and possible settings on page 46 HDMI HDMI Audio Amp HDMI output HDMI OUT ALL Control ON Control Mode ALL Display Power Off YES Setting Default DSP Power On Level LAST Volume Limit OFF Mute Level FULL Phase Control ON Sound Retriever iPod USB HOME ON MEDIA GALLERY SC 37 only INTERNET RADIO SC 35 only ADAPTER PORT function Other functions OFF Sound Delay 0 0 frame Dual Mono CH1 DRC AUTO SACD Gain 0 dB LFE Attenuate 0 dB Auto delay OFF Digital Safety OFF Effect Level ExtendedStereo 90 Other modes 50 oO PL II Music Center Width 3 Options Dimension 0 Panorama OFF Neo 6 Options Center Image Neo 6 MUSIC 3 Neo 6 CINEMA 10 All Inputs Listening Mode AUTO 2 ch multi ch SURROUND DSP settings Listening Mode HP STEREO See also Setting the Audio options on page 76 for other default MCACC MCACC Position Memory M1 MEMORY 1 Channel Level M1 to M6 0 0 dB Speaker Distance M1 to M6 10 00 ft Standing Wave ATT of all channels
144. ception Use the Antenna Aiming option to optimize the antenna position See instructions supplied with the XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock for antenna installation information Check back later Consult the latest channel guide at www xmradio com for the current list of channels For information on receiving this channel visit www xmradio com or contact XM Satellite Radio at 1 800 967 2346 Consult the latest channel guide at www xmradio com for the current list of channels For cases of a new radio or a radio that has not received XM s signal for an extended period allow the radio to receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel again No action required Contact XM Listener Care 1 800 967 2346 and ask about upgrading your XM CNP 1000 to an XM Mini Tuner Have this receiver s model name and CNP 1000 XM Radio ID number ready beforehand and explain that this receiver is displaying the message Upgrade XM Tuner If you already have an XM Mini Tuner connected and you see this message turn off this receiver make sure the XM Mini Tuner is properly seated in the Mini Tuner Home Dock and then turn this receiver on again If the message reappears contact XM Listener Care and explain the issue that you re experiencing and the corrective actions you ve tried Make sure that there is nothing unusual with the antenna or antenna cable Switch the power off then back on again SIR
145. ces Home Media Gallery functions as a WMDRM 10 for networked devices WMDRM protected content can only be played on media servers supporting WMDRM Content owners use WMDRM technology to protect their intellectual property including copyrights This device uses WMDRM software to access WMDRM protected content If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the software s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content Revocation does not affect unprotected content When you download licenses for protected content you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses Content owners may require you to upgrade WMDRM to access their content If you decline an upgrade you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft Note DLNA Gda DLNA CERTIFIED Audio Player The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a cross industry organization of consumer electronics computing industry and mobile device companies Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines This unit co
146. chnology device or wireless LAN or in the vicinity where the magnetic field static electricity or radio wave interference from another device may occur e When living in a housing complex apartment condominium etc where the next door unit has a microwave oven located near to this remote control Note that even a microwave oven will not interfere with this remote control when not in use e When using multiple Omni Directional RF Remote Control in the same location Signal reflection e The signals reaching the remote control include those transmitted in a straight line from the main unit direct waves and those that are received after being bounced off of walls furniture and other buildings reflected waves As a result reflected waves can be generated by obstacles and other reflective objects causing variations in the signal quality In such cases try slightly changing the position of the remote control A caution e With the exception of cases determined by law to be the subject of legal liability Pioneer refuses all responsibility for any harm resulting to the customer or other person as a result of the use of this remote control For safe use e Do not use near electronic devices utilizing high precision or very delicate radio waves since the other device may operate incorrectly resulting in malfunction Examples of devices requiring particular caution e Hearing aids pacemakers and other medical or thera
147. commands 2 Switch off all Pioneer devices including the receiver except DVD recorders and VCRs For greater convenience program this receiver to perform power on off and playback operations on non Pioneer devices as well The signals for Pioneer devices described above are not contingent on programming for non Pioneer devices The buttons that can be programmed using Multi operation or System off are the same buttons as those that can be programmed for other remote controls see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 97 1 e Before Multi operation and System off will work correctly you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components see Setting the remote to contro other components on page 97 for more on this e Some units may take some time to power up in which case multiple operations may not be possible e Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode 2 Some remote controllers for other manufacturers devices use the same signals for switching the power on and off In some cases even if this receiver is programmed to perform these commands power to the non Pioneer devices may not be switched on and off correctly Program the receiver to perform these commands if the non Pioneer device uses separate signals for power on off En EO Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 35 En Programming a Multi operation or a shutdown sequence
148. d cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment To prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions use shielded cables and connectors for connections D8 10 3a_A1_En VENTILATION CAUTION When installing this unit make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation at least 20 cm at top 10 cm at rear and 20 cm at each side WARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating To prevent fire hazard the openings should never be blocked or covered with items Such as newspapers table cloths curtains or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed D3 4 2 1 7b _A1_En D8 10 1 2_A1_En IMPORTANT NOTICE THE MODEL NUMBER AND SERIAL NUMBER OF THIS EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE REAR OR BOTTOM RECORD THESE NUMBERS ON YOUR ENCLOSED WARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SAFE PLACE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE D36 AP9 1_A1_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel If connected to an AC outlet the cut off plug can cause severe electrical shock Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal The equipment should be disc
149. d song select the Favorites folder select the song you want to delete from the folder and press CLR The selected song is then deleted from the Favorites folder Advanced operations for Internet radio Saving Internet radio stations This receiver can remember the Internet radio stations that you often listen to in seven classes A to G with up to nine stations in each class to make the total of 63 stations at its maximum capacity 1 Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE 2 Tune into the Internet radio station that you want to save Tune into the desired Internet radio station by following Steps 2 to 4 on page 65 3 Press T EDIT to switch to the station saving mode 4 Press CLASS to select the class that you want to save the station in Select the desired class from A to G 5 Use t to select the number that you want to save the station as and then press ENTER You can also select the station number by using the number buttons Select the desired number from 1 to 9 Retrieving saved Internet radio stations You need to save Internet radio stations first before retrieving them If there are no Internet radio stations currently being saved see Saving Internet radio stations above and save at least one Internet radio station before proceeding with the following steps 1 Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE 2 Select the class that you want to retrieve an Internet radio stat
150. d trademark of NEC Corporation AAA size IEC RO3 dry cell batteries 0 00 eee 2 POCHC SIGS ocd terane R E A A 1 AM loop antenna ie 8 anand ned eh Sle oe bake vd eines fae 1 FM wire antenna as ve Ma a a ee Code a Pek ace de Panes 1 POWER COPO sadada ane Geo bee Pe dw io ode ae oe ee 1 Miclies aN RCo oe ee oe ee ee eee eee ee ee ree eee ee ee 1 These operating instructions Note e Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice due to improvements En Additional information CH For A Lifetime Dear Customer Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit you ve just purchased is only the start of your musical enjoyment Now it s time to consider how you can maximize the fun and excitement your equipment offers This manufacturer and the Electronic Industries Association s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion and most importantly without affecting your sensitive hearing Sound can be deceiving Over time your hearing comfort level adapts to higher volumes of sound So what sounds normal can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts To establish a safe level e Start your volume control at a low setting e
151. device may not be set to the communication mode supporting the Bluetooth wireless technology Check the setting of the Bluetooth wireless technology device e Check that pairing is correct The pairing setting was deleted from this unit or the Bluetooth wireless technology device Reset the pairing e Check that the profile is correct Use a Bluetooth wireless technology device that supports A2DP profile and AVRCP profile Video Symptom No image is output when an input is selected Remedy e Check the video connections of the source component see page 32 e For HDMI or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV and another component are connected with different cords in Setting the Video options on page 78 you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component e Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video or HDMI cables see The Input Setup menu on page 45 e Check the video output settings of the source component e Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct e Some components such as video game units have resolutions that may not be converted If adjusting this receiver s Resolution setting in Setting the Video options on page 78 and or the resolution settings on your component or display doesn t work try switching Digital Video Conversion in Setting the Video options on page 78 to O
152. disconnected from the Internet The URL for the Internet radio station is incorrectly programmed The broadcasts from an Internet radio station are stopped or interrupted An Internet radio station is selected whose protocol this receiver does not recognize An Internet radio station had closed or moved 12 NTFS and HFS formats cannot be played back on this receiver page 49 See the list of file formats that can be played back on this receiver page 51 This receiver is not compatible with USB hubs Plug the keyboard directly into the receiver PS2 keyboards cannot be used with this receiver even if routed through a PS2 USB connector Use a USB keyboard Some devices will not be detected Use a USB HID Class keyboard Use a US international layout keyboard NB Some characters cannot be entered Remedies Firmly connect the LAN cable page 38 Switch on the router Switch the network device on before the receiver Check the firewall settings for components on the network Check the connection settings for components on the network and consult with your network service provider if necessary page 117 Check that the URL was correctly entered when programming Broadcasts may be interrupted or suspended by the radio station This receiver does not recognize protocols other than http and mms Enter new internet radio station on the Internet Radio Setup Cannot listen to Internet radio B
153. display device Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection component or composite then start playback again e f the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for Support e Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP If it is not compatible with HDCP reconnect the source device using a different type of connection component or composite Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction e Even when Control with HDMI is set to ON for Digital In assignment of HDMI 1 is not canceled so in this case use the HDMI 1 input e Check the HDMI connections e The cable may be damaged e Select ON for the Control with HDMI setting see HDM Setup on page 73 e Select ALL for the Control Mode with HDMI setting see HDMI Setup on page 73 e Turn the TV s power on before turning on this receiver s power e Set the TV side Control with HDMI setting to on see TV s operating instructions e Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal and set the HDMI output to HDMI OUT 1 Then turn on first the TV s power then this receiver s power EE Additional information En Important information regarding the HDMI connec
154. dy Exists already been registered Favorite List Full This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites folder has This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites folder but the Favorites folder is already full If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting above if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely do the following e Press STANDBY ON on the front panel to turn off the power then turn the power back on e f the power cannot be turned off press and hold STANDBY ON on the front panel for over 10 seconds The power will turn off In this case the various settings made on the receiver may be cleared Surround sound formats Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you ll find on BDs DVDs satellite cable and terrestrial broadcasts and video cassettes Dolby The Dolby technologies are explained below See www dolby com for more detailed information QX DOLBY TRUETL PRO LOGIC Ilz Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Pro Logic Surround Ex and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories DTS The DIS technologies are explained below See www dtstech com for more detailed information S dts np Master Audio S dts Neural Surround Manufactured under license under U S Patent s 5 451 942 5
155. e Bare on 131 Sl RIS ha diOme SSA eS ss src troe cote egrets a 132 HOME MEDIAvGALLERYASG 37 ONV 03 aa 133 SUFPOGME ound TONMAS cris a E N ee 135 DO Vita dscasn canara EAEE EE E aoe A EEE 135 PE barnat yt ce Naha tasty ht arte tee tert 135 Windows Media Audio 9 Professional s s s 135 POUL E sais eich Git ie hat eR ante oe ave a eared 135 ADOUDIP OR ak Ga ae es Grease eh or daar in Gh Gr te ary 137 ADOT SO RIGS ANCA sad ebb aieee be weed 137 POURRA GC rers eek eS eats EA woah le 137 FAC DSCOGEl ea 4 tmnt Gente at an wae ead 137 Auto Surround ALC and Stream Direct with GITeKENLINDUE SION al IONMalS 64 4 ccceeeeke se ees 138 Presereode ISL SC 50 ON urs aed os spacers ae wdc and 139 OPECIN GS gus cane m oo ew Sebo o eStats ee each ei 143 VICARIO Te Unies aden S stands 2 a i 144 Flow of settings on the receiver The unit is a full fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals It can be used easily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings The colors of the steps indicate the following Required setting item Setting to be made as necessary 1 Before you start Checking what s in the box page 10 Loading the batteries page 10 ee 2 eas the speakers application page 22 e 9 1 channel surround system Front height e 9 1 channel surround system Front wide e 7 1 channel surround system amp Speaker B connection e 5 1 channel surround system amp
156. e cable included with the iPod but in this case it is not possible to view pictures via the receiver e For the cable connection also refer to the operating instructions for your iPod e For instructions on playing the iPod see Playing an iPod on page 48 supplied Connecting a USB device It is possible to play audio and photo files by connecting USB devices to this receiver It is also possible to connect a USB keyboard US international layout to the receiver to enter text in the following GUI screens e Change the input name in the Input Setup menu page 45 e Add names to radio station presets page 52 e SC 35 only Enter Internet radio station URLs page 56 Note 1 This receiver does not support a USB hub USB mass storage device Connecting a USB device for Advanced MCACC output When using Full Auto MCACC page 43 Auto MCACC page 104 or Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional page 108 to calibrate the reverb characteristics of your listening room the 3D graphs of the reverb characteristics in your listening room before and after calibration can be checked on a computer screen SC 37 only Also the speakers group delay characteristics before and after calibration can be checked on 3D graphs The various MCACC parameters can also be checked on the computer MCACC data and parameters are transferred from this receiver to a USB device and by connectin
157. e control utilizes the 2 4 GHz frequency band This band is also used by a variety of other devices as noted below In particular devices not often cognizant to the user are listed in item 2 Note EO Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 1 Examples of common devices utilizing the 2 4 GHz band e Cordless phone e Cordless facsimile e Microwave oven e Wireless LAN router Wireless AV device e Wireless controllers for games Microwave therapeutic devices Bluetooth wireless technology devices 2 Other devices using 2 4 GHz Shoplitting prevention systems e Amateur wireless radio Distribution control systems at factories and warehouses Railway and emergency vehicle wireless identification systems When such devices are used simultaneously with this remote control signal interference may occur resulting in signal dropouts To improve reception quality try the following e Turn off the other device emitting radio waves e Place the interfering device farther away Move both the remote control and RF adapter away from the interfering device Do not use this remote control in the following locations since transmission interruption may result e Locations where another device using the same 2 4 GHz frequency is being used such as a Bluetooth wireless technology device or wireless LAN or in the vicinity where the magnetic field static electricity or radio wave interference from another device
158. e difficult This chapter explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system Q Important Illustration shows the SC 37 however connections for the SC 35 are the same except where noted Rear panel SC 37 o o as BD N N N ONTROL UT2 LAN 10 100 el ADAPTI ER FORT 100 mA MAX COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE IN H __ 0VD NA NE NE MONTOR ov CD CD R TV SAT ovRvebe De OUT un OA OO OOO O S O O OUNW U ZONE2 ZONES DVD TVSAT VIDEO on PHONO cD CD R TAPE IN IN OUT IN FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH FW FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK 0000 0000 000 O OOOO 00000 00o 0e 0 0000 SUBWOOFER v o SURROUND BACK SURROUND L Single CENTER SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring ooo00 oo000 SEE INSTRUCTION TRIGGER MANUAL SELECTABLE OUTPUT 5 V OUTPUT VOIR LE MODE 150 mA MAX da 2V T D EMPLOI TOTAL cal 150 mA MAX CAUT Sal i 60 162 CU RF100 ATTENTION ENCEINTE D IMPEDANCE DE 62 16 SC 35 OUT 1 OUT 2 ADAPTER PORT BD N N HDMI iN CONTROL OUTPUTS V arene SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE IN E OVD NE NA NE NA MONTOR DvD CD TVISAT DVR BDR VDE OUT s 9 2200 0 8 lols oim m mim ZONE2 ZONE3 DVD TV SAT VIDEO DVR BDR PHONO CD CD R TAPE OUT IN IN OUT IN FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA
159. e of your speaker system You can adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0 5 dB increments The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 114 1 Select Fine Channel Level from the Manual MCACC setup menu The volume increases to the 0 0 dB reference level 2 Adjust the level of the left channel This will be the reference speaker level so you may want to keep the level around 0 0dB so that you ll have plenty of room to adjust the other speaker levels e After pressing ENTER test tones will be output 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels 12 0 dB as necessary Use to adjust the volume of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker When it sounds like both tones are the same volume press to confirm and continue to the next channel e For comparison purposes the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select e f you want to go back and adjust a channel simply use f to select it 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu Note Fine Speaker Distance e Default setting 10 00 all speakers For proper sound depth and separation with your system it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time You can adjust the distance of each s
160. e setting has been successfully completed If the LED flashes three times the setting has failed 4 Press R SETUP to exit the setup 1 Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal e Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart e If the LED flashes for five seconds it means the memory is full See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 98 to erase a programmed button you re not using to free up more memory note that some signals may take more memory than others Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 35 CH Setting the backlight mode e Default setting 1 normal mode The backlight lighting pattern can be selected from among four modes in consideration of convenience and battery service life 1 Press and hold R SETUP then press 6 for three seconds The LED flashes continuously e To cancel the preset setup mode press R SETUP 2 Press the number button for the backlight mode you want to set e 1 normal mode The backlight is turned on and off with the light button After it lights it turns off automatically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds e 2 frequent lighting mode The backlight turns on when any button on the remote control is pressed It is turned off with the
161. e the respective procedure described above Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu The Advanced MCACC Multi Channel ACoustic Calibration system was developed in Pioneer s laboratories with the aim of making it possible for home users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a studio easily and with high precision The acoustic characteristics of the listening environment are measured and the frequency response is calibrated accordingly to allow high precision automatic analysis and optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it closer to a studio environment than ever before Furthermore while it was previously difficult to eliminate standing waves this receiver is equipped with a standing wave control function using a unique process to perform acoustic analysis and reduce their influence This section describes how to calibrate the sound field automatically and fine adjust the sound field data manually 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver 2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use B and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu e Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the Home Menu 3 Select Advanced MCACC from the Home Menu then press ENTER 4 Select
162. e with high sound quality and reproduces the latest in multi channel digital contents e HDMI Ver 1 4 with 3D Audio Return Channel A compatible component is required to use the above function e Remote operation on an iPhone iPod touch Operation via LAN is possible from an iPhone or iPod touch by downloading a Pioneer original application iControlAV from the iTunes Store e iPhone iPod playback Your iPhone or iPod can be connected to the receiver s USB terminal to play the music video files on the iPhone iPod Note e PQLS Jitterless high quality playback is possible by connecting a PQLS compatible player with HDMI connections e Dolby Pro Logic Ilz compatible Adding a pair of speakers above the front left and right speakers adds expressiveness in the vertical direction to the previous horizontally oriented sound field The height channel strengthens the sound field s sense of three dimensionality and air producing presence and expansion e Internet Radio By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal you can listen to Internet radio stations e HOME MEDIA GALLERY This receiver can play back contents stored on your computer when your computer is connected to the LAN terminal of this receiver e XM and SIRIUS Ready With the XM and SIRIUS Radio terminals you ll be up and running in no time e Bluetooth compatible Using the B uetooth ADAPTER Pioneer Model No AS BT100 lets you enjoy musi
163. eatre there are uSually only two speakers This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel This expands the listening position and creates with only two speakers the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre e THX Ultra2 Select2 Plus Before any home theatre component can be THX Ultra2 Select2 Plus certified it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 Select2 Plus logo which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come THX Ultra2 Select2 Plus requirements cover every aspect of the product including pre amplifier and power amplifier performance and operation and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain e THX Surround EX THX Surround EX Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd In a movie theater film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program
164. ect Delete information regarding the Internet radio stations programmed into the currently selected memory will be deleted 4 Enter the URL of the Internet radio station you wish to program Use to select a letter and to move the cursor e A URL containing up to 192 letters can be entered 5 Enter the title of the Internet radio station Use to select a letter and to move the cursor e A title containing up to 22 letters can be entered Programming on the computer screen You can enter the Internet radio list on the screen of a computer that is connected to the same LAN as this receiver and send the list to this unit The computer needs to be connected in advance to the network of this receiver and set up 1 e To listen to Internet radio stations you must have high speed broadband Internet access With a 56 K or ISDN modem you may not enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio e The port number varies depending on the Internet radio station Check the firewall settings e Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted depending on the Internet radio station In this case you cannot listen to a radio station selected from the list of Internet radio stations 2 The Internet radio function cannot be selected in the main zone when the iPod USB function is selected in the sub zone Also the Internet radio function cannot be selected in the sub zone when the iPod USB function is selected in the m
165. ections f the connections were wrong turn off the power disconnect the power cord then reconnect properly After this perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure again f the connections were right select GO NEXT and continue 7 Make sure OK is selected then press ENTER A progress report is displayed on screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings Again try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening It may take 3 to 10 minutes 8 The Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Home Menu menu reappears automatically Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Full Auto MCACC Setup The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system but itis also possible to adjust these settings manually using The Advanced MCACC menu on page 104 or The System Setup and Other Setup menus on page 1 14 2 Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC Setup too much background noise echo off the walls obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone the final settings may be incorrect Check for household appliances air conditioner fridge fan etc that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary If there are any instructions showing in the front panel display please follow them e Some older
166. ed to connect either a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner Sold separately to your satellite ready receiver Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US except Alaska and Hawaii and Canada Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial free music from categories ranging from Pop Rock Country R amp B Dance Jazz Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play games from select leagues and teams Additional programming includes expert sports talk uncensored entertainment comedy family programming local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner you ll need to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite tuners Whichever service you choose there are a variety of programming packages available including the option of adding The Best of SIRIUS programming to your XM tuner or The Best of XM programming to your SIRIUS tuner enabling you to enjoy the most popular programming among both services The Best of packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at this time Note Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for children To subscribe to XM U S customers should visit xmradio com or call 1 800 XMRADIO 1 80
167. elect the MCACC preset you want to check The distance from the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed is displayed for channels that are not connected Standing Wave Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment values for the various MCACC memories See Standing Wave on page 107 for more on this 1 Select Standing Wave from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 When Filter Channel is highlighted use to select the channel for which you want to check standing wave control The standing wave related calibration value for the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed 3 Press to highlight MCACC then use f to select the MCACC preset you want to check Acoustic Cal EQ Use this to display the calibration values for the frequency response of the various channels set in the different MCACC presets See Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 108 for more on this 1 Select Acoustic Cal EQ from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 When Ch is highlighted use to select the channel The calibration value for the frequency response of the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed 3 Press to highlight MCACC then use f to select the MCACC preset you want to check Group Delay SC 37 only Use this to display the calibrated speaker group delay results See Better sound
168. elect one of the seven classes then press PRESET to select the station preset you want You can also use the number buttons to select a station preset 4 Press ENTER After pressing ENTER the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the station Listening to station presets 1 SC 37 only Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE 2 Press TUNER to select the tuner 3 Press CLASS to select the class in which the station is stored Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G 4 Press PRESET to select the station preset you want e You can also use the number buttons on the remote control to recall the station preset Basic playback Naming station presets For easier identification you can name your station presets 1 Choose the station preset you want to name See Listening to station presets on page 52 for how to do this 2 Press T EDIT TUNER EDIT The display shows PRESET NAME then a blinking cursor at the first character position 3 Input the name you want Use B to selecta character to set the position and ENTER to confirm your selection tip e To erase a station name simply repeat steps 1 to 3 and input eight spaces instead of aname e Once you have named a station preset you can press DISP when listening to a station to switch the display between name and frequency Listening to Satellite Radio To listen to Satellite Radio you ll ne
169. ending on the current status mode of the receiver certain options may not be able to be selected Check the table below for notes on this 3 Use to set as necessary See the table below for the options available for each setting 4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu Setting What it does Option s V CONV2e Converts video signals for output ON Digital Video from the MONITOR OUT jacks OFF Conversion including HDMI OUT connector for all video types see page 27 RES Specifies the output resolution of AUTO Resolution the video signal when video input pope signals are output at the HDMI WWW _ OUT connector select this 460p 5 6p according to the resolution of your 720p monitor and the images you wish 7080 to watch 1080p 1080 24p ASP Specities the aspect ratio when THROUGH Aspect input signals are output at the NORMAL _ HDMI output Make your desired settings while checking each setting on your display if the image doesn t match your monitor type cropping or black bands appear PCINEMA This setting optimizes the AUTO PureCinema Operation of the progressive ON scanning circuit for playing film materials Normally set itto AUTO OFF If the picture seems unnatural switch this to ON or OFF P MOTION Adjusts the motion and still picture 4 to 4 Progressive quality when video output is setto Default 0 Motion progressive YNR Reduces noise in the luminance Oto 8
170. eo 6 CINEMA THX CINEMA OO Pro Logic IIx MUSIC THX MUSIC e Neo 6 MUSIC THX MUSIC D0 Pro Logic IIx GAME THX GAMES OO Pro Logic Iliz HEIGHT THX CINEMA OO Pro Logic Iliz HEIGHT THX MUSIC OO Pro Logic Iliz HEIGHT THX GAMES THX ULTRA2 SELECT2 GAMES With multichannel sources press THX HOME THX repeatedly to select from e THX Surround EX Allows you to hear 6 1 or 7 1 channel playback with 5 1 channel sources e Neo 6 CINEMA THX CINEMA OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX CINEMA e THX ULTRA2 SELECT2 CINEMAS Allows you to hear 7 1 channel playback with 5 1 channel sources OO Pro Logic IIx MUSIC THX MUSIC D0 Pro Logic liz HEIGHT THX CINEMA DO Pro Logic liz HEIGHT THX MUSIC OO Pro Logic Iliz HEIGHT THX GAMES e THX ULTRA2 SELECT2 MUSIC This mode is suited not only for sources recorded in Dolby Digital and DTS but also to all multi channel music sources DVD Audio etc e THX ULTRA2 SELECT2 GAMES This mode is suited to playing the sound of games 1 e This mode can only be selected when Speaker System is set to Normal SB FH e When listening sources in OO Pro Logic Iliz HEIGHT mode you can also adjust the H GAIN effect see Setting the Audio options on page 76 2 This mode can only be selected when Speaker System is set to Normal SB FW 3 When listening to 2 channel sources in Neo 6 Cinema or Neo 6 Music mode you can also adjust the center image effect see Setting the Audio opti
171. ere is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction e Depending on the component you have connected using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers e This receiver Supports SACD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD and DTS HD Master Audio To take advantage of these formats however make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format 2 e Use a High Speed HDMI cable If an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI cable is used it may not work properly e When an HDMI cable with a built in equalizer is connected it may not operate properly 3 Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component 4 e HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized Due to this interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback e Turning on off the device connected to this unit s HDMI OUT terminal during playback or disconnecting connecting the HDMI cable during playback may cause noise or interrupted audio Connecting your equipment Connecting your TV and playback components Connecting using HDMI If you have an HDMI or DVI with HDCP equipped component Blu ray disc player BD etc you can connect it to this receiver using acommercially available HDMI cable If the TV and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature the convenient Control with H
172. ertified to THX Ultra2 Select2 specifications e THX Loudness Plus Description THX Loudness Plus is anew volume control technology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus and THX Select2 Plus Certified amplifiers With THX Loudness Plus home theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a Surround mix at any volume level A consequence of turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener THX Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel levels and frequency response This enables users to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume setting THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in any THX listening mode The new THX Cinema THX Music and THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of content e ASA Description ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs Left Center Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left and Subwoofer be sure to go to the THX Audio Set up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker s
173. es the Control with HDMI function When this unit s power is turned off and you have a Supported source begin playback while using the Control with HDMI function the audio and video outputs from the HDMI connection are output from the TV e OFF The Control with HDMI is disabled Synchronized operations cannot be used When this unit s power is turned off audio and video of sources connected via HDMI are not output 6 Select the Control Mode setting you want Choose whether you want to enable HDMI for all linked functions or the PQLS function only However Display Power Off will activate the settings set forth in step 7 below e ALL Enabled for all linked functions e PQLS Enabled only for the PQLS function When PQLS is selected link functions other than the PQLS function may not work properly If you wish to use all link functions select ALL 7 Select the Display Power Off setting you want If the TV s power is turned off while using the Control with HDMI function the receiver s power is also turned off all power off function This function can be disabled e YES The all power off function is enabled The receiver s power turns off together with the TV s power This function only works when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV e NO The all power off function is disabled The receiver s power is not affected when the TV
174. et Auto MCACC menu under Auto MCACC under Advanced MCACC to Full Band Phase Ctrl Select ALL when you perform the Auto MCACC with Auto MCACC menu Upon calibration of the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers the Full Band Phase Ctrl feature is automatically switched on 3 The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after correction can be displayed graphically in the GUI screen see Group Delay SC 37 only on page 111 Also by transferring the measurement data to the computer using a USB device the original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3 dimension on your PC see Output MCACTC data on page 112 4 The Full Band Phase Ctrl mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases When headphones are plugged in When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on When MULTI CH IN input is selected When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 76 Chapter 7 07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs SC 37 only Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs SC 37 only home Enjoying the Home Media Gallery This receiver s Home Media Gallery function allows you to listen to audio Tiles or listen to Internet radio stations on a computer or other component connected to the receiver s LAN terminal This chapter describes
175. ff Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 CH Button s TV TV Monitor BD DVD HDD DVR VCR SAT CATV SOURCE POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF e RUROUNK OER ENTER CH ENTER ENTER CLEAR ENTER CLASS x EXIT INFO EXIT TOP MENU TOP MENU LIST DISC NAVI TOOLS GUIDE USER MENU TOOLS GUIDE GUIDE O TVE M e HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME RETURN RETURN RETURN Re E a ic pe p Fv AUTO SETUP FREEZE ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER RETURN D E E P 4 PGM Rea Red MENU Green amp Yellow gt Blu wl xl D a xl m Oj e Co aq m Ol zZ IT DI clo a e 3 m m vl m d Z Z Zz m m Bu Z AUDIO JAUDIO AUDIO AUDIO CH OUTPUT CH CH CH RESOLUTION 4 a Controls for BD IPE N 3 9 2 O z RECORD EO Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 En Button s ED SOURCE POWER ON OFF Number buttons o0 ENTER ENTER CLASS PGM Red c gt Yellow gt lt Blue DISPLAY INFO a Controls for MD b Controls for SACD c Controls for DAT CD CD R SACD MD DAT POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF CLEAR CLEAR ENTER numerics gt 10 CLEAR DISC ENTER LEGATO LINK SACD SETUP PROGRAM REPEAT SHUFFLE C TIME Button s TV Projector C cL C S E C _ feseRT s je C __ fesers C Sc C C je
176. formed automatically Note Using System off 1 Press MULTI OPERATION The LED flashes continuously 2 Within five seconds press SOURCE The command sequence you programmed will run then all Pioneer components will switch off followed by this receiver switch of all the zones becomes off Erasing the settings for the multi operation This erases all the settings programmed in the remote control for the multi operation 1 Press and hold R SETUP then press 8 for three seconds The LED flashes continuously e To cancel the preset setup mode press R SETUP 2 Press the input function button containing the program you want to cancel or the SOURCE button for three seconds If the LED lights for one second the erasing has been successfully completed 1 With Multi operation the HDMI and TV CTRL settings cannot be made For other settable input functions see Setting the remote to contro other components on page 97 2 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording no DVD recorder power off codes are sent Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 35 CH Resetting the remote control settings Use this procedure to reset all the remote control s settings to the factory default 1 Press and hold R SETUP then press 0 for three seconds The LED flashes continuously 2 Press and hold the ENTER button for three seconds If the LED lights for one second
177. function when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected 2 Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives portable flash memory drives particularly key drives and digital audio players MP3 players of format FAT16 32 e Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility operation and or bus power with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver 3 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device 4 SC 35 only The iPod USB function cannot be selected in the main zone when the Internet radio function is selected in the sub zone Also the iPod USB function cannot be selected in the sub zone when the Internet radio function is selected in the main zone 5 Note that non Roman characters in the playlist are displayed as 05 Basic playback 3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you Basic playback controls want to play then press gt to start playback 1 Button s What it does Basic playback controls ENTER gt Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow This receiver s remote control buttons can be used for RETURN Stops the player and returns to the previous basic playback of files stored on USB memory devices menu SC 37 Haa Displays the previous photo content e Set the remote control operation selector switch to ea Picnic ec iacanicnl SOURCE then press iPod
178. g and ZONE 2 connections in addition to for the surround back speakers Make this setting according to the application Front height setup Default setting 1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals See Standard surround connection on page 25 2 If necessary select Normal SB FH from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 115 to do this Front wide setup 1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals See Standard surround connection on page 25 2 Select Normal SB FW from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 115 to do this Speaker B setup You can listen to stereo playback in another room 1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals See Standard surround connection on page 25 2 Select Speaker B from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 115 to do this Bi Amping setup Bi amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5 1 channel surround sound 1 Connect bi amp compatible speakers to the front and surround back speaker terminals See Bi amping your speakers on page 26 2 Select Front Bi Amp from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 115 to do this Note ZONE 2 setup With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5 1 channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component i
179. g the USB device to a computer the data is imported via the MCACC software in the computer The MCACC software to output the results is available from the support area of the Pioneer website http www pioneerelectronics com PUSA Home Entertainment Custom Install Instructions for using the software are also available here If you have any questions regarding please contact the Customer Support Division of Pioneer See the documentation provided with the Advanced MCACC PC Display Application Software for more information e For the USB device connection and operations see Output MCACC data on page 112 2 The various parameters and the reverb characteristics data used for display on the computer are not cleared when the power is turned off see Output MCACC data on page 112 En Connecting your equipment 03 Connecting an IR receiver Operating other Pioneer components If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinetor with this unit s sensor shelving unit or you wish to use the sub zone remote control in another zone you can use an optional IR receiver such as a Niles or Xantech unit to control your system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of this receiver Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks which can be used to link components together so that you can use just the remote sensor of one component When you use a remote control the control signal is passed along the chain to the a
180. ge 62 HOME THX Press to select a Home THX listening mode page 60 STANDARD SURROUND Press for Standard decoding and to switch various modes O00 Pro Logic Neo 6 etc page 59 ADVANCED SURROUND Use to switch between the various surround modes page 61 STEREO Switches between stereo playback and Front Stage Surround Advance modes page 61 14 MULTI ZONE controls If you ve made MULTI ZONE connections see MULTI ZONE setup on page 37 use these controls to control the sub zone from the main zone see Using the MULTI ZONE controls on page 79 15 SPEAKERS Use to change the speaker terminal page 79 16 HOME MENU Press to access the Home Menu pages 43 45 73 104 114 and 117 17 RETURN Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen 18 HDMI input connector Use for connection to a compatible HDMI device Video camera etc page 39 19 iPod iPhone USB terminals Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio and video source or connect a USB device for audio and photo playback page 40 20 MCACC SETUP MIC jack Use to connect the supplied microphone page 43 21 PHONES jack Use to connect headphones When the headphones are connected there is no sound output from the speakers K Note 1 Optimum Surround mode is only apply to the SC 37 Connecting your equipment Chapter 3 Connecting your equipment This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities but it doesn t have to b
181. ghes Network Systems 1016 1020 1022 1023 1024 Humax 1016 1020 Hush 1017 iBUYPOWER 1017 Instant Replay 1004 JC Penney 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 JCL 1004 JVC 1000 1001 1020 1029 Kenwood 1000 1001 Kodak 1003 1004 LG 1003 Linksys 1017 Lloyd s 1005 LXI 1003 Magnavox 1004 1018 Magnin 1003 Marantz 1000 1001 1004 Marta 1003 Matsushita 1004 Media Center PC 1017 MEI 1004 Memorex 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1018 1019 Echostar 6002 6089 6036 6005 6003 6004 6146 Expressvu 6002 6004 Fujitsu 6133 6134 6135 Fortec Star 6123 6023 Fresat 6014 Funai 6070 GE 6111 General Instrument 6032 GOI 6002 6004 Grundig 6007 6030 Hirschmann 6033 Hisense 6020 Hitachi 6038 6049 6132 Houston 6002 HTS 6002 6004 Hughes Network Systems 6113 6038 6054 6114 6115 6116 Hyundai 6016 iLo 6020 Innova 6059 Jerrold 6032 6128 6149 6150 6151 6152 6153 6154 6155 6156 6157 JVC 6002 6003 6004 Kathrein 6096 Lava 6053 LG 6047 6018 Marantz 6102 MGN Technology 1002 Microsoft 1017 Mind 1017 Mitsubishi 1010 Motorola 1004 MTC 1002 Multitech 1002 1005 NEC 1000 1001 Nikko 1003 Niveus Media 1017 Noblex 1002 Northgate 1017 Olympus 1004 Optimus 1003 Orion 1014 1019 Panasonic 1004 1008 Philco 1004 Philips 1004 1011 1016 1020 1022 1023 1024 1025 Philips Magnavox 1011 Pilot 1003 Proscan 1030 Pulsar 1018 Quarter 1001 Quartz 1001
182. h an input resolution of 4801 5761 can be converted from the component video input for the composite MONITOR OUT terminals 03 Connecting your equipment En If several video components are assigned to the same input function see The nput Setup menu on page 45 the converter gives priority to HDMI component then composite in that order Terminal for connection with TV monitor Terminal for connection with source device gt HDMI IN HDMI OUT p 2 O Y Ps Pr y Ps Pr I COMPONENT COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO IN MONITOR OUT VIDEO MONITOR OUT VIDEO IN Video signals can be output e For optimal video performance THX recommends switching Digital Video Conversion in Setting the Video options on page 78 OFF This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights Use ofthis copyright protection technology must be authorized by Rovi Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Rovi Corporation Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited Note About HDMI The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video as well as almost every kind of digital audio This receiver incorporates High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI technology This receiver supports the functions described below through HDMI connections e Digital transfer of
183. he rest of your system In case of SC 37 CH 1 Connect the IR blaster cable to the RF Adapter s IR Blaster terminal and mount the transmitter on the component you want to operate with RF communications RF adapter Operation is not possible unless the IR blaster is mounted in an appropriate position Whenever possible mount it above the other component s remote control sensor If mounted below the influence of external light etc could hamper reception Mount the IR blaster securely to a position near the other component s remote control sensor For the location of the other component s remote control sensor see the component s operating instructions Clean any dirt or dust off the place at which the double faced tape is to be attached beforehand Note that the double faced tape is strong and that trying to peel it off the shelf etc after it has been applied may damage the shelt s surface 2 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press HOME MENU The remote display shows SETUP MENU 3 Use t to select IR RF SELECT then press ENTER Check that the units are paired If RECEIVER MAIN is displayed pairing has been performed properly so proceed to step 4 If RF MODE ONLY flashes pairing has not been performed properly so perform this procedure again after performing pairing see Pairing the RF adapter and remote control on page 92 4 Use t to select input function for the component you want to operate usi
184. hen the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH the sound will be heard through your TV not from this receiver 4 e This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD for instance e When PCM is selected noise may be output during playback of non PCM sources Please select another input signal if this is a problem Listening to your system Phase Control technology provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image The default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all sound sources 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode e Press PHASE CTRL PHASE CONTROL to switch on phase correction The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control SC 357 only This receiver is equipped with the two types of functions that correct phase distortion and group delay Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control Activating Full Band Phase Control is strongly recommended because it also involves the effects of Phase Control The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers connected Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency bands output from a speaker system consisting of multiple speakers in case of typical 3 way
185. hen you connect the high frequency driver Bi wiring your speakers and low frequency driver of your speakers to different Your speakers can also be bi wired if they support bi amplifiers for better crossover performance Your amping speakers must be bi ampable to do this having separate terminals for high and low and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you re using e With these connections the Speaker System setting makes no difference e To bi wire a speaker connect two speaker cords to A CAUTION the speaker terminal on the receiver Ea Using a banana plug for the second connection is e Most speakers with both High and Low terminals recommended have two metal plates that connect the High to the Low terminals These must be removed when you are bi amping the speakers or you could severely damage the amplifier See your speaker manual for more information If your speakers have a removable crossover network make sure you do not remove it for bi amping Doing so may damage your speakers caution e Don t connect different speakers from the same terminal in this way e When bi wiring as well heed the cautions for bi amping shown at the left En Connecting your equipment 03 Selecting the Speaker system The front height terminals can be used for front wide and Speaker B connections in addition to for the front height speakers Also the surround back terminals can be used for bi ampin
186. here are several audio tracks on the disc the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected When playing certain discs e The disc may not contain 5 1 6 1 channel material Check the disc packaging for more on what none of the receiver s format audio tracks are recorded on the disc indicators light When playing a disc with the Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on page 62 listening mode set to Auto e f a two channel soundtrack is currently playing including Dolby Surround encoded then this is Surround or ALC BO PL Ilor not a malfunction Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available Neo 6 appear on the receiver During playback of DVD Audio This will occur when playing DVD Audio material over the HDMI connection This is not a the display shows PCM malfunction The power turns off e See the Power section page 122 automatically and some indicator flashes or some indicator flashes and the power does not turn on Additional information Remote control Symptom Remedy Cannot be remote controlled Set the remote control unit s remote control mode so that it matches the setting on the main unit see Operating multiple receivers on page 84 SC 37 page 96 SC 35 e Check whether the receiver s remote control mode is properly set see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 119 e Try replacing the batteries in the remote control see Loading the b
187. his device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Caution FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator and your body Thank you for buying this Pioneer product Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly After you have finished reading the instructions put them away in a safe place for future reference Contents 01 Before you start Our philosophy Pe ee ae ae Ga a a ee oo a ae ae Ge are arenes CHECKINGAVNGL S NiE DOX karer sie ake ae ees Installing the receiver Loading ING Daner Seicis nanena 6440544 e00mne oa Operating range of remote control unit 8 Flow for operating the receiver with RF two way communications SC 37 only 02 Controls and displays Remote control In case of SC 37 2 eee eee ee ee PeMIOle CON Ol Dy wa o tm wre ae She ee ee Br IC tO E E Seton he Gey et E E E aac eet neat Remote control In case of SC 35 eee ee es Bie cl aera ec a eee E ee ee eee ee Front panel 03 Connecting your equipment Re ely eS apie Sige am sists we aes ais ed ge ie a ei a apse ae Connecting the RF adapter SC 37 only wee ee ees Determining the speakers
188. his function is activated when Control is set to ON e Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press PQLS to select the PQLS setting The setting is displayed on the front panel display e PQLS AUTO PQLS is enabled A precision quartz controller in this receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors jitter giving you the best possible digital to analog conversion when you use the HDMI interface This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLS compatible players e PQLS OFF PQLS is disabled Note Cautions on the Control with HDMI function e Connect the TV directly to this receiver Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter such as an HDMI switch can cause operational errors e Only connect components Blu ray disc player etc you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this receiver Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter such as an HDMI switch can cause operational errors e When Control is set to ON HDMI Input in The Input Setup menu on page 45 is automatically set to OFF e When the receiver s Control is turned ON even if the receiver s power is in the standby mode it is possible to output the audio and video signals from a player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound from the receiver but only when a Control with HDMI compatible component Blu ray disc player etc and compatible TV are connected In this case
189. ic Setup En Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone If you have a tripod use it to place the microphone so that it s about ear level at your normal listening position If you do not have a tripod use some other object to install the microphone The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone is connected 1a Full Auto MCACC A V RECEIVER Speaker System Normal SB FH EQ Type SYMMETRY MCACC M1 MEMORY 1 THX Speaker 5 NO START Return 3 Select the parameters you want to set If the speakers are connected using any setup other than Normal SB FH be sure to set Speaker System before the Full Auto MCACC Setup See Speaker system setting on page 115 e Speaker System Shows the current settings When this is selected and ENTER is pressed the speaker system selection screen appears Select the proper speaker system then press RETURN to return e EQ Type his determines how the frequency balance is adjusted Note e MCACC The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions Simply choose an unused preset for now you can rename it later in Data Management on page 112 e THX Speaker Select YES if you are using THX speakers set all soeakers to SMALL otherwise leave it set to NO 4 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then select START 5 Follow the instructions on scree
190. ied to the surround channels of all 5 1 and 2 0 encoded game sources such as analog PCM DTS and Dolby Digital This accurately places all game audio surround information providing a full 360 degree playback environment THX Ultra2 Select2 Games mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field THX the THX logo Ultra2 Plus and Select2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd which may be registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Additional information About iPod iPod PEGIN Made for iPod means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards Works with iPhone means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPhone and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc About SIRIUS and XM SIRIUS R EA D Y gt lt Ready XMHD SIRIUS XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc and its subsidiaries All other marks and logos are the property of their respective owners A
191. ile the pertinent setup screens are displayed to select MCACC presets For some of the settings below you ll have to connect the setup microphone to the front panel and place it about ear level at your normal listening position Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu before you connect the microphone to this receiver e See Problems when using the Auto MCACTC Setup on page 45 for notes regarding high background noise levels and other possible interference e f you re using a Subwoofer switch it on and turn up the volume to the middle position 1 Select Manual MCACC from the Advanced MCACC menu See Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 104 if you re not already at this screen 2 Select the setting you want to adjust If you re doing this for the first time you might want to make these settings in order e Fine Channel Level Make fine adjustments to the overall balance of your speaker system see Fine Channel Level on page 107 e Fine SP Distance Make precise delay settings for your speaker system see Fine Speaker Distance on page 107 1 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone listening position or when using speakers that affect the phase dipole speakers reflective speakers etc Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected 2 e Depending on the characteristics of your room sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm
192. ing environment we recommend adjusting the settings manually 04 Basic Setup e Input Skip When set to ON that input is skipped when selecting the input using INPUT SELECT DVD and other inputs can be still be selected directly with the input function buttons e 12V Trigger1 2 After connecting a component to one of the 12 volt triggers see Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 42 select MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 or OFF for the corresponding trigger setting to switch it on automatically along with the main or sub zone specified 7 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the System Setup menu Note Input function default and possible settings The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the name of one of the input functions If you have connected components to this receiver differently from or in addition to the defaults below see The nput Setup menu on page 45 to tell the receiver how you ve connected up The dots indicate possible assignments Input Terminals Input function DVD BD TV SAT DVR BDR VIDEO HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 front panel HOME MEDIA GALLERY INTERNET RADIOS iPod USB XM RADIO CD CD R TAPE TUNER ADAPTER PORT PHONO MULTI CH IN SIRIUS Digital HDMI Component COAX 1 eo IN 1 BD OPT 1 eo OPT 2 oe IN 2 OPT 3 eo IN 3 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5
193. ion from Each time you press CLASS the class switches to A to G in turn 3 Use f to select the station number that you want to retrieve You can also select the station number by using the number buttons Preset Not Stored appears when you select an Internet radio station currently not being saved 07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs SC 37 only En Checking about the Accounts Screen concerning Rhapsody or Sirius Internet Radio account registration Before proceeding with the following steps check whether you have followed Steps trom 1 to 2 on page 65 1 Select Setup then press ENTER 2 Select Accounts and press ENTER to confirm your selection 3 Select Rhapsody or Sirius and press ENTER The contents below can be checked when Rhapsody is selected e Sign in to Rhapsody Set Account e Account Info The contents below can be checked when Sirius is selected e Set Account When disposing of the product we recommend you reset it to delete the data See Resetting the system on page 82 About network playback The network playback function of this unit uses the following technologies Windows Media Player See Windows Media Player 11 Windows Media Player 12 on page 71 for more on this Windows Media DRM Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights Management WMDRM is a platform to protect and securely deliver content for playback on computers portable devices and network devi
194. is receiver If the video signal does not appear on your TV try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display Note that some components Such as video game units have resolutions that may not be converted In this case use an analog video connection Selecting the multichannel analog inputs If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as above you must select the analog multichannel inputs for Surround sound playback 1 Make sure you have set the playback source to the proper output setting For example you might need to set your DVD player to output multichannel analog audio 2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then use INPUT SELECT to select MULTI CH IN You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel e Depending on the DVD player you re using the analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be too low In this case the output level of the subwoofer can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup in Other Setup For details see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 120 1 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL page 62 2 You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver It should be set to output Dolby Digital DTS and 88 2 kHz 96 kHz PCM 2 channel audio and if there is an MPEG audio option set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM 3 When playback from the multicha
195. it s connected to the left channel speaker terminal e Surround back speakers will not play while the Speaker System is set to Speaker B and audio is being played through speaker B e Check that the front height or front wide speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL and the surround speakers are not set to NO see Speaker Setting on page 115 e Check the speaker connections see Connecting the speakers on page 24 Additional information Symptom Remedy No sound from subwoofer e Check that the subwoofer is connected properly switched on and the volume turned up e f your subwoofer has a sleep function make sure it is switched off e Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS see Speaker Setting on page 115 e The crossover frequency may be set too low try setting it higher to match the characteristics of your other speakers see Speaker Setting on page 115 e f there is very little low frequency information in the source material change your speaker settings to Front SMALL Subwoofer YES or Front LARGE Subwoofer PLUS see Speaker Setting on page 115 e Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF or to avery quiet setting see Setting the Audio options on page 6 e Check the speaker level settings see Channel Level on page 116 No sound from one speaker e Check the speaker connection see Connecting the speakers on page 24 e Check the speaker level settings see Channel Level on page 116 e Check th
196. ital input you connected the player to see he nout Setup menu on page 45 03 Connecting your equipment Connecting an HDD DVD recorder BD recorder and other video sources This receiver has two sets of audio video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices including HDD DVD recorders and BD recorders When you set up the receiver you ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to see also 7he Inout Setup menu on page 45 HDD DVD recorder BD recorder etc S ee co ocd Me omen 0 Select one DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL R ANALOG L VIDEO OUT VIDEO AUDIO IN R ANALOG L OUT1 OUT 2 CONTROL OUTPUT 5 Vy HDMI d a ES ASSIGNABLE 1 0 E E z IN Ng a INA CD R TVISAT DVRBDR VIDEO FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FHIFW FRONT CENTER Single ZONE2 ZONE3 OUT DVD OUT IN ojoo 0000 SIGNAL GND FRONT HEIGHT WIDE E SURROUND BACK SURROUND L R Pe SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring o oo Po SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION NUAL VOIR LE MODE D EMPLOI OUTPUTS V OUTPUT 150 mA MAX M2 12V m C CU RF100 CAUTION SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 69 160 ATTENTION ENCEINTE DIMPEDANCE DE 69 160 e n order to record you must connect the analog a
197. ital or DIS surround sound source you should hear surround sound If you are playing a stereo source you will only hear sound from the front left right speakers in the default listening mode e See also Listening to your system on page 59 for information on different ways of listening to sources It is possible to check on the front panel display whether or not multi channel playback is being performed properly For details see Auto Surround ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 138 When using a Surround back speaker DOD PLIIx MOVIE is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals and DTS Neo 6 is displayed when playing DIS 5 1 channel signals Note If the display does not correspond to the input signal and listening mode check the connections and settings 5 Use the volume control to adjust the volume level Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is coming from the speakers connected to this receiver Playing a source with HDMI connection e Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then use INPUT SELECT to select the HDMI input you ve connected to for example HDMI 1 You can also perform the same operation by using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing HDMI on the remote control repeatedly e Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 76 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV no sound will be heard from th
198. jin 6077 Shaw 6074 Starcom 6122 Stargate 6122 Suddenlink 6074 6029 Supercable 6072 Time Warner 6074 6029 6058 Tivo 6076 Toshiba 6112 United Cable 6072 6122 US Electronics 6072 Videoway 6112 Zenith 6112 Shaw 6074 Suddenlink 6074 6029 Supercable 6072 Time Warner 6074 6029 6058 Tivo 6076 Technics 5041 Victor 5014 Yamaha 5024 5025 5038 5046 5047 Additional information Specifications Amplifier Section Continuous average power output of 140 watts per channel min at 8 ohms from 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz with no more than 0 08 total harmonic distortion Multi channel simultaneous power output 1 kHz 1 8 Q POCO aces one wc eee ees 770 W SC 37 700 W SC 35 Continuous Power Output 20 Hz to 20 kHz 8 Q 0 08 FOU ae f a ace eee diay geen heme ba ee eee 140 W 140 W Center aa henaer ae eee eae eee tad baes eon 140 W UEC PECET ETET TETEE wowace Sand 140 W 140 W Surround back Front height wide 140 W 140 W Continuous Power Output 1 kHz 6 Q 1 0 FTON ence pace Bese eee eae eae een sen 180 W 180 W ST aes oun we ace w ca bares eee eae eae eee 180 W OIG a one 5 a ate ce dey EE dese ew ace ene 180 W 180 W Surround back Front height wide 180 W 180 W Total harmonic distortion o 4 lt a cace dm ke Ob dow Cw wees 0 05 20 Hz to 20 kHz 130 W 8 Q Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission s Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for Amplifiers
199. l operations buttons not covered in the presets after assigning a preset code Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls The buttons available are shown below AUDIO VIDEO PARAMETER PARAMETER x LIST TUNE TOOLS Pa RECEIVER MULTI SOURCE A lt OPERATION a R SETUP HOME TUNE BD DVD_ DVR BDR HDMI iPod CTRL C3 AUTO ALC PGM_ MEMORY MENU DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR TV CD NETRADIO ADAPTER a aa Se iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS XM HOME TV DTV _MPX PQLS nour once warm aD f me J J Cm J C HDMI OUT AUDIO MASTER INPUT VOLUME SIGNALSEL MCACC SLEEP INFO C TV CONTROL CH LEVEL A ATT DIMMER E 7 E s io CH VOL CH D ACCESS CLASS fran Co ora C 1 Press and hold R SETUP then press 2 for three seconds The LED flashes continuously e To cancel the preset setup mode press R SETUP 2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control The LED blinks once and flashes continuously 1 The remote can store about 120 preset codes from other components this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only EO Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 35 En 3 Point the two remote controls towards each other then press the button that will be doing the learning on this receiver s remote control The LED blinks once and flashes continuously e The remote controls should be 3 cm 1 inch apart
200. l shows ERROR briefly and then display PRESS KEY again If this happens keep pressing the teaching button as you vary the distance between the two remotes until the remote display shows OK Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls The buttons available are shown below IV CUNTRUL RECEIVER MAIN ip SOURCE INPUT MUTE MUTE ZONE2 3 PARAMETER PARAMETER TUNE TOOLS a MULTI OPERATION T EDIT BDR E5 BvD owe Hom NET RADIO C E rs ora USB OPTION ios nel C C2 H MENU MULTICH GAL TUNE PTY SEARCH STATUS PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL Grow Cin Wom A INPUT SELECT LIGHT MAIN AIRE STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR PQLS MEMORY SIGNALSEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO UL L A ATT SBch MCACC INFO TAE E HDMI OUT aA 9 D ACCESS CLASS CH a E o es CH VOL Ea TV CONTROL wer wore 6 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 4 and 5 To program signals for another component exit and repeat steps 1 through 5 7 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds to exit and store the operation s Wa VIDEO Erasing one of the remote control button settings This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default 1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press HOME MENU The remote display shows SETUP MENU 1 The remote can store
201. lay etc page 76 Setting the Video options page 78 J 12 Other optional adjustments and settings Control with HDMI function page 72 e The Advanced MCACC menu page 104 The System Setup and Other Setup menus page 114 13 Making maximum use of the remote control SC 37 e Operating multiple receivers page 84 e Setting the remote to control other components page 84 e Using the RF communications function page 91 SC 935 e Operating multiple receivers page 96 e Setting the remote to control other components page 97 Before you start Chapter 1 Before you start Our philosophy Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater listening experience as close as possible to the vision of the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they created the original soundtrack We do this by focusing on three important steps 1 Achieving the highest possible sound quality 2 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration according to any listening area 3 Fine tuning the receiver with the help of world class studio engineers With the cooperation of AIR Studios this receiver has been designated A R Studios Monitor AIR STUDIOS MONITOR Features e Direct Energy HD Amplifier Through a collaboration Pioneer and CEpower have jointly development a unique class D amplifier called a Direct Energy HD High Fidelity Class D amplifier This new generation reference amplifier offers outstanding performanc
202. layer 12 on your PC page 64 Play back audio files recorded in MP3 WAV LPCM only MPEG 4 AAC FLAC or WMA Note that some audio files recorded in these formats may not be played back on this receiver Audio files recorded in MPEG 4 AAC or FLAC cannot be played back on Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 Try using another server Refer to the operation manual supplied with your server Check whether the component is affected by special circumstances or is in the sleep mode Try rebooting the component if necessary Try changing the settings for the component connected to the network Check the folder stored on the component connected to the network Additional information Symptoms Cannot access the component connected to the network Audio playback is undesirably The audio file currently being played back was not stopped or disturbed Cannot access Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 Cannot listen to Internet radio stations The Home Media Gallery cannot be operated with the buttons on the remote control Causes The component connected to the network is not properly set There are no playable audio files on the component connected to the network recorded in a format playable on this receiver The LAN cable is currently disconnected There is heavy traffic on the network with the Internet being accessed on the same network When in the DMR mode depending
203. le Connect the DVD player s video signals using a composite or component cord DVD player etc ed oo aes eee gt see Select one Select one COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT VIDEO HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL R ANALOG L a Fo ADAPTER PORT OUTPUTS V 100 mA MAX r HDMI ASSIGNABLE 1 0 COMPONENT VIDEO j E OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE pvo Ng NE INA CD R TV SAT DVRIBDR DVR BDR OUT IN R HOOOlO ma Zag R SURROUND AMLOOP FMUNBAL75 Q oO SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL CONTROL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D EMPLOI m CU RF100 CAUTION SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 69 160 ATTENTION ENCEINTE DIMPEDANCE DE 69 169 e Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio on the receiver Do not use an HDMI cable to input video signals Depending on the video component it may not be possible to output signals connected by HDMI and other methods simultaneously and it may be necessary to make output settings Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your component for more information If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver connect the receiver and TV with audio cables page 29 If you use an optical digital audio cable you ll need to tell the receiver which dig
204. led e PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 with Windows Media Player 12 installed e DLNA compatible digital media servers on PCs or other components Files stored ina PC or DMS Digital Media Server as described above can be played via command from an external Digital Media Controller DMC Devices controlled by this DMC to play files are called DMRs Digital Media Renderers This receiver supports this DMR function When in the DMR mode such operations as playing and stopping Tiles can be performed from the external controller Volume adjustment and the muting control are also possible The DMR mode is canceled if the remote control unit is operated while in the DMR mode aside from certain buttons including the VOL MUTE and DISP To play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations you must turn on the DHCP server function of your router In case your router does not have the built in DHCP server function it is necessary to set up the network manually Otherwise you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations See Network Setup menu on page 117 for more on this Authorizing this receiver In order to be able to play with Home Media Gallery this receiver must be authorized This happens automatically when the receiver makes a connection over the network to the PC If not please authorize this receiver manually on
205. light button After it lights it turns off automatically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds e 3 eco mode The backlight is turned on and off with the light button After it lights it turns off automatically if no operation is performed for 5 seconds e 4 off mode The backlight does not turn on even when the light button is pressed If the LED lights for one second the setting has been successfully completed If the LED flashes three the setting has failed 3 Press R SETUP to exit the setup Note Multi operation and System off The Multi operation feature allows you to program a series of up to 5 commands for the components in your system e Be sure to call up the preset codes of devices or perform programming signals for other remote controls before multi operation memory programming page 97 The Multi operation feature makes it easy to perform the following operations by pressing just two buttons Press MULTI OPERATION and then the DVD input function button to 1 Switch this receiver on 2 Switch this receiver s input to DVD 3 Transmit a sequence of up to five programmed commands Similar to Multi operations System off allows you to use two buttons to stop and switch off aseries of components in your system at the same time Only one System off operation sequence may be programmed Press MULTI OPERATION and then SOURCE to 1 Transmit a sequence of up to five programmed
206. ll begin playing via this receiver If the connection failed Connection NG will be displayed Check to see if the URL you entered is correct Q Important e Connection OK and Connection NG are only displayed when this receiver is set to the Internet radio function e When entering the title and URL of Internet radio station do not press Update while you are connected to other stations i e labelled as Connecting Note 1 The Bluetooth ADAPTER AS BT100 is sold separately Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music Device not equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology Digital music Bluetooth Bluetooth wireless player wireless technology technology enabled device Bluetooth audio enabled device Digital music transmitter cell phone player sold commercially m O Bluetooth ADAPTER A Remote control operation Wireless music play When the B uetooth ADAPTER Pioneer Model No AS BT100 is connected to this unit a product equipped with B uetooth wireless technology portable cell phone digital music player etc can be used to listen to music wirelessly Also by using a commercially available transmitter supporting B uetooth wireless technology you can listen to music on a device not equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology The AS BT100 model supports SCMS T contents protection So
207. ll rights reserved SIRIUS and XM subscriptions sold separately Taxes and a one time activation fee may apply XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners each sold separately are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service All programming and fees subject to change It is prohibited to copy decompile disassemble reverse engineer hack manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio Systems Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii SIRIUS XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc and its subsidiaries All rights reserved Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii Record the SiriusConnect tuner ID below for reference OOOOH Record the XM Radio ID below for reference L Note The XM Radio ID does not use the letters I O S or F About FLAC FLAC Decoder Copyright 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 Josh Coalson Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
208. ls See page 48 49 52 53 57 and 101 1 RECEIVER This switches between standby and on for this receiver 2 MULTI OPERATION Use to perform multi operations page 99 R SETUP Use to input the preset code when making remote control settings and to set the remote control mode page 83 3 Input function buttons Press to select control of other components page 83 Use INPUT SELECT to select the input function page 47 4 TVCTRL Set the preset code of your TV s manufacturer when controlling the TV page 97 5 TV CONTROL buttons These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL button 6 Receiver setting buttons Press RECEIVER first to access AUDIO PARAMETER Use to access the Audio options page 76 VIDEO PARAMETER Use to access the Video options page 78 HOME MENU Use to access the Home Menu pages 43 45 73 104 114 and 117 RETURN Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen 7 ENTER Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system see page 104 and the Audio or Video options page 76 or 78 8 Receiver Control buttons Press RECEIVER first to access AUTO ALC DIRECT Switches between Auto Surround page 59 Auto Level Control mode and Stream Direct mode page 62 STEREO Switches between stereo playback and Front Stage Surround Advance modes page 61 STANDARD Press for Standard decoding and t
209. ls in the Manual MCACC setup on page 106 e Switch on the digital safety feature While holding down ENTER on the front panel press STANDBY ON to set this receiver to the standby mode Use TUNE f to select D SAFETY lt OFFP and then use PRESET to select 1 or 2 select DSAFETY lt OFF gt to deactivate this feature If the power switches off even with 2 switched on turn down the volume With 1 or 2 on some features may be unavailable e Try switching the receiver off then back on again e Try disconnecting the power cord then connect again e The receiver may have a serious problem Do not try switching the receiver on Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company e There is a problem with the receiver s power unit or fan Try turning on the power after 1 minute If the same thing happens the receiver is damaged Unplug the receiver from the wall and calla Pioneer authorized independent service company Other symptoms may appear when the power is turned on e Allow the unit to cool down in a well ventilated place before switching back on e Wait at least 1 minute then try turning the power on again e The power unit is damaged Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company e An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks Reconnect accurately then turn the power back on No sound Symptom No sound is output when an input
210. m setting on page 115 you can t adjust the surround back settings e f the surround speakers are set to NO the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO 2 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer This may not however yield the best bass results Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations In this case try changing the position or direction of speakers If you can t get good results listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best If you re having problems the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers 3 This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE or the subwoofer and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel e With Full Auto MCACC Setup or Auto MCACC Setup ALL or Speaker Setting the setting here will not apply and the crossover frequency will be automatically set Crossover frequency is a frequency aimed at achieving the optimal sound field taking into account the bass capacity of all connected speaker
211. may occur depending on the environment radio waves may not transmit effectively Move the radio farther away If visual noise appears on the television screen it is possible that this remote control is producing adverse influence on the antenna input of the television video device BS tuner or CS tuner Move this remote control farther away from the antenna input of the affected device 1 e When the remote control s input is switched the receiver s input also switches but for functions for which the remote control direct function page 86 is set to off when the remote control s input is switched the receiver s input does not switch and only the remote control unit s operating screen switches e The remote control operation mode is only valid when the remote control operation selector switch is set to SOURCE Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 CH Usable range e Designed for use only within private homes signal transmission distance may be reduced due to room design or conditions In the following cases this remote control cannot operate due to poor or erratic radio wave transmission e When signal transmission is blocked by a wall or floor constructed of ferro concrete or metal Nearby large metal furniture objects In large crowds of people or near obstructive buildings Locations where another device using the same 2 4 GHz frequency is being used such as a Bluetooth wireless te
212. mber of factors bass reproduction capabilities of the speakers room size speaker placement etc this may occur in some cases Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 115 and use the ALL Keep SP System option for the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC Expert on page 104 if this is a recurring problem Can t adjust the Fine Speaker Check that the speakers are all in phase make sure the positive and negative terminals are Distance setting page 107 matched up properly properly SC 37 only Gauge value does Check that the speakers are all in phase make sure the positive and negative terminals are not increase with the Precision matched up properly Distance adjustment e Perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure before the Precision Distance adjustment see Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 e Place the microphone accurately in the same position as when the Full Auto MCACC procedure was performed e Do not move the speaker used as the reference point Also adjust in order starting from the front right speaker e When adjusting the speaker positions do not move the speakers much only move them about 1 inch towards or away from the microphone e f you forget exactly where the microphone should be positioned or if there are problems after the procedure has been performed repeatedly re calibrate the distance using the Full Auto MCACC procedure then without m
213. ment is too drastic and might distort If this happens bring the level down until OVER disappears from the display Note CF tip e Changing the frequency curve of one channel too drastically will affect the overall balance If the speaker balance seems uneven you can raise or lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM feature Use Tf to select TRIM then use to raise or lower the channel level for the current speaker 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in your listening room i e it Sounds boomy or that different channels seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics when Type A or Type B shown on the diagrams on the following applies select EQ Pro amp S Wave or ALL for the Auto MCACC setting in Automatic MCACC Expert on page 104 to calibrate the room automatically e Type A Reverberance of high vs low frequencies Low frequencies High frequencies Acoustic Cal EQ Pro calibration range Conventional MCACC EQ calibration range Time 0 80 160 in msec e Type B Reverb characteristics for different channels Level Fro
214. mplies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1 5 When aPC running DLNA server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this player some setting changes of software or other devices may be required Please refer to the operating instructions for the software or device for more information DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance Content playable over a network e Even when encoded in a compatible format some files may not play correctly Movie or Photo files cannot be played back e There are cases where you cannot listen to an Internet radio station even if the station can be selected from a list of radio stations e Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used Supported file formats vary by server As such files not supported by your server are not displayed on this unit For more information check with the manufacturer of your server 1 Some operating procedures etc may be changed at the discretion of Rhapsody and Sirius Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs SC 37 only CH About playback behavior over a network e Playback may stall when the PC is switched off or any media files stored on it are deleted while playing content e fthere are problems within the network environment heavy network traffic etc content may not be displayed or played properly playback may be interrupted or stalled For best
215. n Please connect your USB memory for the MCACC data then press OK to output them shows on the GUI screen 2 Connect your USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel then select OK Please wait will be displayed on the screen and transmission of measurement data to the USB device will begin Transmission is complete when Complete is displayed Note Data Management This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets allowing you to calibrate your system for different listening positions or frequency adjustments for the same listening position This is useful for alternate settings to match the kind of source you re listening to and where you re sitting for example watching movies from a sofa or playing a video game close to the TV From this menu you can copy from one preset to another name presets for easier identification and clear any ones you don t need 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu 2 Select Data Management from the Home Menu 3 Select the setting you want to adjust e Memory Rename Name your MCACC presets for easy identification see Renaming MCACC presets below e MCACC Memory Copy Copy settings from one MCACC preset
216. n Make sure the microphone is connected and if you re using a Subwoofer make sure it is switched on and set to a comfortable volume level 6 Wait for the test tones to finish then confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen A progress report is displayed on screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup Try to be as quiet as possible while it s doing this If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed the Full Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically In this case you don t need to select OK and press ENTER in step 7 e With error messages such as Too much ambient noise or Check microphone select RETRY after checking for ambient noise see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 45 and verifying the mic connection If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply select GO NEXT and continue 1a Full Auto MCACC A V RECEIVER Now Analyzing 2 10 1a Full Auto MCACC A V RECEIVER YES By lo Hoes amp Environment Check Ambient Noise OK ES gt Microphone aN Q Speaker YES NO g Cancel Cancel gt The configuration shown on screen should reflect the actual speakers you have 1 Install the microphone on a stable floor Placing the microphone on any of the following surfaces may make accurate measurement impossible e Sofas
217. n and restores the factory default This function is handy for erasing all data programmed for devices no longer being used 1 Press and hold R SETUP then press 9 for three seconds The LED flashes continuously e To cancel the preset setup mode press R SETUP 2 Press and hold the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased for three seconds If the LED lights for one second the erasing has been successfully completed Direct function e Default setting On You can use the direct function feature to control one component using the remote control while at the same time using your receiver to play a different component This could let you for example use the remote control to set up and listen toa CD on the receiver and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player When direct function is on any component you select using the input function buttons will be selected by both the receiver and the remote control When you turn direct function off you can operate the remote contro without affecting the receiver 1 Press and hold R SETUP then press 5 for three seconds The LED flashes continuously e To cancel the preset setup mode press R SETUP 2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control 3 Press 1 On or 0 Off to switch the direct function mode If the LED lights for one second th
218. n MCACC preset you re Currently using this can t be undone 3 Select OK to confirm and clear the preset When MCACC Memory Clear is displayed select YES If NO is selected the memory is not cleared Completed shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu Note 1 The settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 104 gt The System Setup and Other Setup menus En Chapter 12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus Q Important e The procedure for setting the receiver operation mode differs for the remote controls included with the SC 37 and SC 35 For the SC 37 s remote control set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER For the SC 35 s remote control press the IRECEIVER button When set the remote control to the receiver operation mode is indicated in these instructions use the respective procedure described above Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu The following section describes how to change the speaker related settings manually and make various other settings input selection OSD language selection etc 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver 2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press HOME
219. n ZONE 2 1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals See Standard surround connection on page 25 2 Select ZONE 2 from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 115 to do this About the audio connection Wa latyiclesle w lecelle signals HD audio Types of cables and terminals Digital Coaxial i Conventional digital audio Sound signal priority gt Digital Optical Bo RCA Analog White Red S m e With an HDMI cable video and audio signals can be transferred in high quality over a single cable Conventional analog audio About the video converter The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks The only exception is HDMI since this resolution cannot be downsampled you must connect your monitor TV to the receiver s HDMI video outputs when connecting this video source 1 If the video signal does not appear on your TV try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display Note that some components Such as video game units have resolutions that may not be converted In this case try switching Digital Video Conversion in Setting the Video options on page 78 OFF e The signal input resolutions that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 480i 576i 480p 576p 720p and 1080i 1080p signals cannot be converted e Only signals wit
220. n also occur in weak XM signal conditions Note that this receiver may not respond to some buttons while this message is displayed The XM Mini Tuner is not receiving the XM satellite signal Something may be blocking the XM antenna s view of the satellites or the antenna is not properly aimed The XM channel you selected is not currently broadcasting You selected an XM channel that is blocked or cannot be received with your XM subscription package The selected channel is not available The channel may have been reassigned to a different channel number This message may occur initially with a new radio or a radio that has not received XM s signal for an extended period No artist name or song title is available for this selection The connected XM CNP 1000 is incompatible This receiver features advanced technology that is designed for use with the XM Mini Tuner A short circuit occurring in the antenna or surrounding antenna cable Action Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to the XM Mini Tuner Home Dock and check the antenna cable for damage Replace the XM antenna if the cable is damaged This message should disappear in a few seconds in good signal conditions If you see this message often reposition the XM antenna for better signal reception Use the Antenna Aiming option to optimize the antenna position Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the XM antenna to get better signal re
221. n be used in most cases e Others Select to use a passcode other than those mentioned above 6 Ifyou selected Others in step 5 enter the passcode Use T 4 to select a number and to move the cursor 7 Follow the instructions displayed on the GUI screen to conduct pairing with the B uetooth wireless technology device Switch on the B uetooth wireless technology device that you want to make pair place it near the receiver and set it to the pairing mode 8 Check to see that the Bluetooth ADAPTER is detected by the Bluetooth wireless technology device When the Bluetooth wireless technology device Is connected CONNECTED appears in the receiver display When the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not connected Go back to the passcode setting in step 5 In this case perform the connection operation from the B uetooth wireless technology device Note 9 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device list select Bluetooth ADAPTER and enter the Passcode selected in step 5 Listening to music contents of a Bluetooth wireless technology device with your system 1 SC 37 only Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE 2 Press ADAPTER on the remote control to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input 3 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device perform the operation to connect to the Bluetooth ADAPTER 4 Start playback of music contents stored on the Bluetooth wireless technolog
222. nction page 43 SC 37 only For the volume and sound quality as well accurate sound field correction using the equalizer and speaker phase characteristic correction using the Full Band Phase Control function page 63 together make it possible to achieve the ideal listening environment Step 1 Speaker layout and distance adjustment Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers are steady and leave at least 10 cm 4 inches from the surrounding walls Position the speakers attentively so that the speakers on the left and right are at equal angles trom the listening position center of the adjustments We recommend using cords etc when adjusting the layout Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant from the listening position Tip e Ifthe speakers cannot be set at equal distances ona circle use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance correction and Fine Speaker Distance or Precision Distance SC 37 only functions to make them equalize the distance artificially Step 2 Adjusting the speaker height Adjust the heights angles of the different speakers Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing mid and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as the front speakers adjust its angle of elevation to point it to the listening position Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height of the ears Step 3 Adjusting
223. nd pause only when Theme on the Slideshow Setup is set to Normal OFF K Note 1 e Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver e DRM protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver 2 Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone ED If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for five minutes the list screen reappears En Basic playback About playable file formats The USB function of this receiver supports the following Tile formats Note that some Tile formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats Music files Category Extension Stream MP32 mp3 MPEG 1 2 2 5 Audio Layer 3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit Channel 2 ch Bitrate 8kbpsto320kbps i s t s sS VBR CBR Suppported Supported Wav wav LPCM Sampling frequency 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 KHZ Quantization bitrate 8 bit 16 bit Channel 2ch Monaural S Quantization bitrate 16 bit Channel 2 ch Bitrate 8kbpsto320 kbps s S VBR CBR s SSupported Supported a MPEG Layer 3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia b Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported specifically Pro Lossless Voice Photo files JPEG JPG Format Meeting the following conditions Jpeg e Baseline JPEG format including files recorded in Exit DCF format jpe e Y C
224. nd rn inia Beardie ase ached ee ade areca aes Setting the remote control operation mode Precautions when using the Omni Directional RE Remo COMI osc merear eaaa athe Seas Precautions regarding wavelength 0 e065 WW isye tel esd al 16s een eee ee ere eC re ome eae ar A ER ee AALTO CUO e at el a ed cr Sait eR east POS ale UE E ius weed 2g auce talanacnes wee tq Auda ttl A A 74 10 Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 35 ADOUTING Remote Set MeN sss Ares cud iene 96 Operating Multiple reCelvers tak snk cake whee ees 96 Setting the remote to control other components 97 Selecting preset codes directly 002e eee eeee 97 Programming signals from other remote controls 97 Erasing one of the remote control button settings 98 Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input TUNC hse ehh a Ah ak al ee he ot BAR a ak cae 98 Direct Tan ClO Wie We aee ao ie ed tarsi eek eo 98 SEMIN THE packi hEm dE s bee racke ee aoe ge ee 99 Multieperationand SyStem OM want Sooo pce K 99 Programming a Multi operation or a shutdown SCOUCNICS mes wide aS tae cles Sede Ue Eo eed 100 SING PAU ITMODEACMS a 5 dudes oie a aa ah Bede ats 100 SIG OV SUCTION 9245 0 ao aonvevarn os Gratscstere siacave eee 100 Erasing the settings for the multi operation 100 Resetting the remote control settingS 101 Default prese COG ES aaaea ae acd N A 101 CONTO AG COM DOMES akai aaea aa dee earn 101 11 The Advanced M
225. nding on the Internet radio station In this case you cannot listen to a radio station selected from the list of Internet radio stations Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs SC 37 only Cm Listening to Sirius Internet Radio Check the website below to listen to Sirius Internet Radio http www sirius com siriusinternetradio e You must have a registered account in order to listen to songs using Sirius Internet Radio For details see Checking about the Accounts on page 68 e Some functions may be changed at Sirius s discretion Listening to Neural Music Direct Neural Music Direct is an Internet radio station managed and operated by Neural Audio Neural radio stations deliver multichannel surround sound The Neural Surround mode is automatically selected and lets you enjoy arich multichannel surround sound experience M MUSIC N DIRECT Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation Playing back your favorite songs You can register up to 20 of your favorite songs or Internet radio stations in the Favorites folder Note that only the audio files stored on components on the network can be registered Registering and deleting audio files and Internet radio stations in and from the Favorites folder Press PGM while a song is being played back or stopped The selected song is then registered in the Favorites folder Up to 20 songs or Internet radio stations can be registered To delete a registere
226. ndow refer to the manual for the SiriusConnect Home tuner for antenna placement recom mendations e If after pressing OPTION 1 SC 37 SIRIUS SC 35 the display shows Antenna Error try disconnecting the antenna and reconnecting If the display shows Check Sirius Tuner check the connection of the AC adapter and this receiver to the SirlusConnect tuner After connecting you will be able to use this receiver to select channels and navigate categories using the GUI screen display 1 You can reset the channel presets and memory in Resetting the system on page 82 2 You can reset the Channel Skip Add settings in Resetting the system on page 82 3 e In order to activate your radio subscription you will need the SIRIUS ID SID which uniquely identifies your tuner The SID may be found on a sticker located on the packaging or on the bottom of the tuner itself The label will have a printed 12 digit SID number When you have located the SID write it down in the space provided near the end of this manual Contact SIRIUS on the internet at https activate siriusradio com Follow the prompts to activate your subscription or you can also call SIRIUS toll free at 1 888 539 SIRIUS 1 888 539 7474 e Select 0 SIRIUS ID from the on screen display to check the Radio ID of the SiriusConnect tuner See Selecting channels and browsing by genre on page 55 4 You can check the strength of reception in Using the SIRI
227. ne Please be sure to use the latest available software version e iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction of non copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce e Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting e Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from the iPod failure e When listening to a track on the iPod in the main zone it is possible to control the sub zone but not to listen to a different track in the sub zone from the one playing in the main zone 2 The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver 3 Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as e This feature is not available for photos on your iPod To display photos switch iPod operation to the iPod see Switching the iPod controls on page 49 4 During Audiobook playback press to switch the playback speed Faster gt Normal gt Slower Basic playback Switching the iPod controls You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod and the receiver 1 Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls This enables operation and display on your iPod and this receiver s remote control and GUI screen become inactive 2 Press iPod CTRL
228. nect the FM wire antenna into the FM antenna socket For best results extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame Don t drape loosely or leave coiled up Connecting your equipment Connecting external antennas To improve FM reception connect an external FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 Q 75 Q coaxial cable ANTENNA AM LOOP FMUNBAL75 Q To improve AM reception connect a5 m to 6 m 16 ft to 20 ft length of vinyl coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna For the best possible reception suspend horizontally outdoors Outdoor antenna Indoor antenna vinyl coated wire gt 5 m Z Z gt 5mto6m 16 ft to 20 ft AMLOOP FM UNBAL 75 Q MULTI ZONE setup This receiver can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI ZONE connections Different sources can be playing in three zones at the same time or depending on your needs the same source can also be used The main and sub zones have independent power the main zone power can be off while one or both of the sub zones is on and the sub zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel controls Note Making MULTI ZONE connections It is possible to make these connections if you have a separate TV and speakers for your primary ZONE 2 sub zone and a separate TV and a separate amplifier and speakers for you
229. ng Goes aude siteets SIMIC RGUISOIAY 2 5 feo howe oe eee hele ka SWEARING TACT MISO OTOUE b suai ie edna enti ak eee Using the Web COAT Ol TUNCION eae s ced ede ees Checking Your system Seting rakia a ire beeen deal be RESCHENO INES VSTO sang ae te ah aa A EAIA Detault systern SETIINGS eenia eraa oe bce ees 10 Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 About the Remote Setup Menus a Taatad das bees Operating MUDIE VECeCIVeRS aanita i Sued ead Ae Setting the remote to control other components Selecting preset codes directly 2 cece ee eeee Programming signals from other remote controls Erasing one of the remote control button settings Resetting the input assignment of one of the input TURLO a WUO Wl Sitti ce As date E E races 2 Resetting the remote control settingS 5 COnN NO Drese COCES aiue ra a ia Renaming input function names manually Direct LUCIO Mare te eiia e oO R Mult Operation and Sy STE ha Oi aaea eaa EA Programming a multi operation or a shutdown SOE AE E ake Set E E E E Seemann SnO Oper ON aa a A eae DNE ENE line A aos So cat alae EE Sat E TE Conton COM PONEAISs 4 02 400s neiedesadawads Using tne RE COMMUNICATIONS TUNCIONis344 204 i038 Pairing the RF adapter and remote control Operating this receiver by RF communications Operating other components by RF COMIN CA ONG 4 3 wieatee da eee eh eee la a cee Renaming input function names in synchrony with UNE TOCCIVE miri
230. ng RF communications then press ENTER Select the input component to which the IR blaster was mounted in step 1 5 Use t to select RF MODE then press ENTER Select IR MODE to return to operation by infrared signal 6 If other input function buttons also switch to RF communications operation repeat step 4 to 5 7 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds to exit and store the operation s Note Renaming input function names in synchrony with the receiver e Default setting MANUAL The remote control input display names can be synchronized with the input names that have been changed at Input Name on the receiver s Input Setup menu page 45 and acquired automatically There are two modes AUTO in which the receiver s input names are acquired automatically each time the input is switched and MANUAL in which the receiver s input names are only acquired for input functions selected manually Even when input names are changed manually at Renaming input function names manually on page 86 when synchro renaming is performed here the input name is overwritten 1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press HOME MENU The remote display shows SETUP MENU 2 Use t to select SYNC RENAMING then press ENTER MANUAL flashes in the remote display 3 Use t to select AUTO or MANUAL then press ENTER If you selected AUTO this completes the setting The receiver s input names are acq
231. ng this configuration Note e f your display only has one HDMI terminal you can only receive HDMI video from the connected component e Depending on the component audio output may be limited to the number of channels available from the connected display unit for example audio output is reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio limitations If you want to switch the input function you ll have to switch functions on both the receiver and your display unit e Since the sound is muted on the display when using the HDMI connection you must adjust the volume on the display every time you switch input functions Remedies Store the folders files in the FAT region Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder to 8 page 49 There are more than 80 000 folders files stored in Limit the maximum number of folders files stored a USB memory device The audio files are copyrighted A USB memory device is not The USB memory device does not support the mass storage class specifications recognized A USB hub is currently being used ina USB memory device to 30 000 page 49 Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB memory device cannot be played back page 49 Try using a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications Note that there are cases where even the audio files stored on a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications are not played back on this
232. ng to a source press STEREO to select Front Stage Surround Advance modes e STEREO See Listening in stereo above for more on this e F S SURR FOCUS Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center of where the front left and right speakers sound projection area converges e F S SURR WIDE Use to provide a surround sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode FOCUS position Recommended WIDE position Front left speaker Front left speaker Frontright speaker Frontright speaker 1 The SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only selected when the ADAPTER PORT input Using Stream Direct Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the truest possible reproduction of a source All unnecessary signal processing is bypassed and you re left with the pure analog or digital sound source Processing differs depending on the input signal and whether or not surround back speakers are connected For details see Auto Surround ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 138 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode 2 While listening to a source press AUTO ALC DIRECT AUTO SURR ALC STREAM DIRECT to select the mode you want Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed e AUTO SURROUND See Auto playback on page 59 e ALC Listening in Auto level control mode page 59 e DIREC
233. ng type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Soe Se WARNING This equipment is not waterproof To prevent a fire or shock hazard do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment Such as a vase or flower pot or expose it to dripping splashing rain or moisture D3 4 2 1 3_A1_En WARNING Before plugging in for the first time read the following section carefully The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area where this unit will be used meets the required voltage e g 230 V or 120 V written on the rear panel D3 4 2 1 4 _A1_En 11 Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer 12 Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over LA aa 0 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel
234. nnel inputs is selected only the volume and channel levels can be set e You can t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs e With MULTI CH IN inputs it is possible to play pictures simultaneously For details see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 120 05 Basic playback En Playing an iPod This receiver has the iPod iPhone USB terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV See Connecting an iPod on page 40 e lt is also possible to operate the iPod on the iPod itself without using the TV screen For details see Switching the iPod controls on page 49 2 SC 37 only Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE 3 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod USB Loading appears in the GUI screen while the receiver verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod When the display shows the iPod top menu you re ready to play music from the iPod Playing back audio files stored on an iPod To navigate songs on your iPod you can take advantage of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver You can also control all operations for music in the front panel display of this receiver Finding what you want to play When your iPod is connected to this receiver you can browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist ar
235. nnot be used when the receiver is in the standby mode This lets you reduce power consumption in the standby mode 1 In case you make changes to the network configuration without the DHCP server function make the corresponding changes to the network settings of this receiver 2 The IP address determined by the Auto IP function is 169 254 X X You cannot listen to an Internet radio station if the IP address is set for the Auto IP function The System Setup and Other Setup menus Cz The Other Setup menu The Other Setup menu is where you can make customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu 2 Select System Setup from the Home Menu 3 Select Other Setup then press ENTER 4 Select the setting you want to adjust If you are doing this for the first time you may want to adjust these settings in order e HDMI Setup Synchronizes this receiver with your Pioneer component supporting Control with HDMI page 73 e Volume Setup Sets up the volume related operations of this receiver see below e Remote Control Mode Setup Sets this receiver s remote control mode see below Flicker Reduction Adjusts the way the GU
236. ns BD DVD DVR BDR HDMI TV CD__NETRADIO ADAPTE ot O Pod USB TUNER SIRIUS _ XM L JL JL JCS INPUT SELECT Tv cTRL Ri CEIVER ESES o Selecting preset codes directly 1 Press and hold R SETUP then press 1 for three seconds The LED flashes continuously e To cancel the preset setup mode press R SETUP 2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL press TV CTRL here The LED blinks once and flashes continuously 3 Use the number buttons to enter the 4 digit preset code See Preset code list SC 35 only on page 139 Note If the LED lights for one second the setting has been successfully completed When the preset code is fully input the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed If this happens enter the 4 digit preset code again 4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other components you want to control To try out the remote control switch the component on or off into standby by pressing SOURCE If it doesn t seem to work select the next code from the list if there is one 5 Press R SETUP to exit the preset setup mode Programming signals from other remote controls If the preset code for your component is not available or the available preset codes do not operate correctly you can program signals from the remote control of another component This can also be used to program additiona
237. nt L Front R Acoustic Cal EQ Pro Conventional MCACC calibration range EQ calibration range Time 0 80 160 in msec If the pattern is as shown above select the 30 50ms setting If not this setting is not necessary 1 Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection The Advanced MCACC menu Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional 1 Select EQ Professional then press ENTER 2 Select an option and press ENTER e Reverb Measurement Use this to measure the reverb characteristics before and after calibration e Reverb View You can check the reverb measurements made for specified frequency ranges in each channel e Advanced EQ Setup Use this to select the time period that will be used for frequency adjustment and calibration based on the reverb measurement of your listening area Note that customizing system calibration using this setup will alter the settings you made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 104 and is not necessary if you re satistied with these settings 3 If you selected Reverb Measurement select EQ ON or OFF and then START The following options determine how the reverb characteristics of your listening area are displayed in Reverb View e EQ OFF You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area without
238. nt is switched on 11 K Lights when the sound is muted page 16 12 Master volume level Shows the overall volume level indicates the minimum level and 12dB indicates the maximum level 13 Input function indicators Light to indicate the input function you have selected HMG only lights for the SC 37 14 Scroll indicators Light when there are more selectable items when making the various settings 15 Speaker indicators Lights to indicate the current speaker system A and or B page 79 16 SLEEP Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode page 81 Note 1 Full Band Phase Control is only apply to the SC 37 17 Matrix decoding format indicators DOPRO LOGIC IIx This lights to indicate DO Pro Logic Il OO Pro Logic IIx decoding page 59 Neo 6 When one of the Neo 6 modes of the receiver is on this lights to indicate Neo 6 processing page 59 18 S RTRV Lights when the Sound Retriever function is active page 76 19 Character display Displays various system information 20 Remote control mode indicator Lights to indicate the receiver s remote control mode setting Not displayed when set to 1 SC 37 page 84 SC 35 page 96 En Controls and displays Front panel 1 2 INPUT SELECTOR gt STANDBY ON 9 1011 12 AUDIO PARAMETFR VIDEO J K J yo RY Z Hf A 16 1 STANDBY ON Switches the receiver between on and s
239. nts connected with an HDMI cable The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable The video delay time is automatically adjusted according to the audio delay time 9 C WIDTH Provides a better blend of the Center front speakers by spreading the Width center channel between the front Applicable right and left speakers making it only when sound wider higher settings or using a narrower lower settings center speaker Option s CH1 Channel 1 is heard only CH2 Channel 2 is heard only CH1 CH2 Both channels heard from front speakers AUTO MAX MID OFF OdB 50B 100B 15daB 20dB OFF OdB 6 dB AMP THROUGH Oto 7 Default 3 What it does DIMENSION Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance trom front to back making the sound more distant minus settings or more forward positive settings Setting PANORAMA Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect C IMAGE Adjusts the center image to Center create a wider stereo effect with Image vocals Adjust the effect from 0 Applicable all center channel sent to front only when right and left speakers to 10 using a center channel sent to the center center speaker only speaker EFFECT Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced Surround or ALC mode each mode can be se
240. ntura 1005 Aiwa 1005 Alienware 1017 American High 1004 Asha 1002 Audio Dynamics 1000 Audiovox 1003 Bang amp Olufsen 1032 Beaumark 1002 Bell amp Howell 1001 Calix 1003 Candle 1002 1003 Canon 1004 Citizen 1002 1003 Colortyme 1000 Craig 1002 1003 Curtis Mathes 1000 1002 1004 Cybernex 1002 CyberPower 1017 Daewoo 1005 DBX 1000 Dell 1017 DIRECTV 1016 1020 1022 1023 1024 1027 1030 1031 Dish Network 1029 Dishpro 1029 Durabrand 1018 Dynatech 1005 Echostar 1029 Electrohome 1003 Electrophonic 1003 Emerson 1003 1004 1005 Expressvu 1029 Fisher 1001 Fuji 1004 Funai 1005 Satellite Set Top Box Pioneer 0126 6097 6098 6145 ADB 6035 6001 Akai 6102 Alba 6005 6013 6011 Allsat 6102 Alltech 6011 Amstrad 6033 6030 6044 Anttron 6013 Asat 6102 Austar 6000 6045 BELL 6160 Bell ExpressVu 6002 6003 British Sky Broadcasting 6030 Canal 6105 Chaparral 6034 CNS 6001 Coolsat 6021 Crossdigital 6043 Digenius 6104 Digiwave 6053 DirecTV 6070 6110 6111 6062 6063 6113 6008 6038 6054 6069 6060 6059 6043 6018 6114 6115 6116 6093 Dish Network System 6002 6089 6003 6004 Dishpro 6002 6089 6004 DX Antenna 6140 E Aichi 6141 Garrard 1005 Gateway 1017 GE 1002 1004 GOI 1029 Goldstar 1000 1003 Gradiente 1005 Harley Davidson 1005 Harman Kardon 1000 Headquarter 1001 Hewlett Packard 1017 HNS 1016 Howard Computers 1017 HP 1017 HTS 1029 Hu
241. o confirm and exit the current menu 2 Select System Setup from the Home Menu 3 Select Network Setup from the System Setup menu 4 Select the setting you want to adjust If you are doing this for the first time you may want to adjust these settings in order e IP Address Proxy Sets up the IP address Proxy of this receiver page 118 e Information Checks the MAC address and the firmware version of the Network section of this receiver page 118 e Network Standby Allows the Web Control function to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode page 118 1 Since the principal is the same X Curve isn t applied when you re using any of the Home THX Pure direct or Optimum surround modes 2 Ultra2 for the SC 37 Select2 for the SC 35 IP address Proxy setting In case the router connected to the LAN terminal on this receiver is a broadband router with a built in DHCP server function simply turn on the DHCP server function and you will not need to set up the network manually You must set up the network as described below only when you have connected this receiver to a broadband router without a DHCP server function Before you set up the network consult with your ISP or the network manager for the required settings It is advised that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component IP Address The IP address to be entered must be defined within the following
242. o switch various modes OO Pro Logic Neo 6 etc page 59 ADV SURR Use to switch between the various surround modes page 61 THX Press to select a Home THX listening mode page 60 PHASE CTRL Press to switch on off Phase Control page 62 STATUS Press to check selected receiver settings page 81 PQLS Press to select the PQLS setting page 75 En gt Controls and displays En HDMI OUT Switch the HDMI output terminal page 81 SIGNAL SEL Use to select an input signal page 62 MCACC Press to switch between MCACC presets page 62 SLEEP Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and select the amount of time before sleep page 81 CH LEVEL Press repeatedly to select a channel then use to adjust the level page 116 A ATT Attenuates lowers the level of an analog input signal to prevent distortion page 80 DIMMER Dims or brightens the display page 81 9 MULTI ZONE select buttons Switch to perform operations in ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 page 80 10 Remote control LED Lights when a command is sent from the remote control Display CECE ry Sobicirar PLus DOT HD WMA9P CTY Sts ER see ay to DIGITAL aS fe TUNER CD R_ PHONO 16 1718 1 SIGNAL indicators Light to indicate the currently selected input signal AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input signal automatically page 62 2 Program format indicators Light to indi
243. o Logic IIx MOVIE Up to 7 1 channel sound Surround back especially suited to movie sources OO Pro Logic IIx MUSIC Up to 7 1 channel sound surround back especially suited to music sources OO Pro Logic IIx GAME Up to 7 1 channel sound surround back especially suited to video games e DO PRO LOGIC 4 1 channel surround sound sound from the surround speakers is mono 1 If the surround back speakers are not connected or V SB is switched OFF page 76 DO Pro Logic IIx becomes D0 Pro Logic Il 5 1 channel sound 2 When listening to 2 channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic Ilx Music mode there are three further parameters you can adjust C WIDTH DIMENSION and PANORAMA See Setting the Audio options on page 76 to adjust them OO Pro Logic Iliz HEIGHT Up to 7 1 channel sound front height WIDE SURROUND MOVIE Up to 7 1 channel sound front wide especially suited to movie sources WIDE SURROUND MUSIC Up to 7 1 channel sound front wide especially suited to music sources e Neo 6 CINEMA 7 1 channel sound surround 3 back especially suited to movie sources e Neo 6 MUSIC 7 1 channel sound surround back especially suited to music sources e Neural Surround Up to 7 1 channel sound surround back especially suited to music sources e XM HD Surround Up to 7 1 channel sound especially suited to music sources 4 With multichannel sources if you have connected surround back
244. o the speakers their position with a precision of under 1 2 inch Here rather than correct the numerical value of the distance actually move the physical positions of the speakers to fine adjust the subwoofer cannot be adjusted The input from the microphone is indicated on the screen Fine adjust the positions of the speakers so that the gauge reading is maximum The detailed distance adjustments that were previously performed by skilled installers by ear can easily be performed watching the gauge on the monitor Place the microphone in the same position as when the microphone was connected and the Full Auto MCACC operation was performed 1 Select Precision Distance from the Manual MCACC setup menu 2 Fine adjust the positions of the speakers in sequence starting from the front right channel Test pulses are output from the speaker for the selected channel and from one other speaker Move the position of the selected speaker 1 2 inch towards or away from the microphone Watch the screen when doing so and fine adjust the positions of the speakers so that the gauge reading is maximum Also the channel serving as the standard differs according to the channel being adjusted Do not move the speaker serving as the standard channel The maximum gauge reading is 10 0 Ifthe reading stays under 10 0 adjust the speaker for the maximum value 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC set
245. oP Q Important e Please refer to the manual that came with your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the speaker cables to your speakers e Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer Itis not possible to connect using speaker cables A caution e Make sure that all speakers are securely installed This not only improves sound quality but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes Connecting your equipment 03 Installing your speaker system At the very least front left and right speakers only are necessary Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like it must be connected to the left surround back terminal Standard surround connection The front height terminals can also be used for the front wide and Speaker B speakers Front height setting Front height right Front height left Front wide setting Front wide right Front wide left Speaker B setting Speaker B right Speaker B left Front right Front left Center Subwoofer LINE LEVEL NPUT ADAPTER PORT OUTPUT 5V 100 mA MAX IN OUT 1 CONTROL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE MONITO OUT ee our BOR PHONO i a TVISAT DVRBDR VIDEO a ZONES ON v i 1
246. oft website 08 Control with HDMI function En Chapter 8 Control with HDMI function Q Important e The procedure for setting the receiver operation mode differs for the remote controls included with the SC 37 and SC 35 For the SC 37 s remote control set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER For the SC 35 s remote control press the RECEIVER button When set the remote control to the receiver operation mode is indicated in these instructions use the respective procedure described above Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI compatible Pioneer TV or Blu ray disc player or with a component of another make that supports the Control with HDMI functions are possible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable The receiver s volume can be set and the sound can be muted using the TV s remote control The receiver s input switches over automatically when the TV s channel is changed or a Control with HDMI compatible component is played The receiver s power is also set to standby when the TV s power is set to standby Q Important With Pioneer devices the Control with HDMI functions are referred to as KURO LINK You cannot use this function with components that do not support Control with HDMI We do not guarantee this receiver will work with Pioneer Control with HDMI compatible components or components of other makes that supp
247. ommend using the Reverb Measurement function 2 e The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected To use another MCACC preset press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store e The predicted reverb characteristics after calibration can be acquired with the Full Auto MCACC function Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 but here the actually measured reverb characteristics after calibration can be acquired 3 After auto calibration with EQ Type SYMMETRY Full Auto MCACC etc the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics can be displayed by selecting Reverb View To display the actually measured reverb characteristics after EQ calibration measure with EQ ON 4 The After display when measurements have been made using the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC ALL or KEEP SP system function shows the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics after EQ Type SYMMETRY calibration 5 To specify the place where the MCACC memory is to be stored press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store ED The Advanced MCACC menu En Precision Distance SC 37 only Before using this function perform the Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure see page 43 Performing the Full Auto MCACC procedure corrects the distance to a precision of 1 2 inch but the Precision Distance function lets you adjust the distance t
248. ompatible player However the connected DVD player set top box etc must be able to output WMA9 Pro format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital output Turntables only e f your turntable has a grounding wire secure it to the ground terminal on this receiver e f your turntable has line level outputs i e it has a built in phono pre amp connect it to the CD inputs instead Note 1 e Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e With WMA9 Pro sound problems may occur depending on your computer system Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz En Connecting your equipment Connecting additional amplifiers This receiver has more than enough power for any home use but it s possible to add additional amplifiers to every channel of your system using the pre outs Make the connections shown below to add amplifiers to power your speakers ANALOG N Front channel amplifier Center channel amplifier mono OL Suratna channel amplifier IGNABLE IN DR VIDEO Front height or Front wide channel amplifier Q Y ANALOG Isuewoo Pl 7 INPUT K SURROUNDBACK f SURROUND Sumound BECK l A 5 CA ie ae a channel amplifier F S li amp fz S S Qa a mE Ly JON VIMPEDANCE 6
249. onnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time for example when on vacation D3 4 2 2 1a_A1_En CAUTION The OSTANDBY ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power Therefore make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident To avoid fire hazard the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time for example when on vacation D3 4 2 2 2a _A1_En This product is for general household purposes Any failure due to use for other than household purposes such as long term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period K041_A1_En WARNING Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the product may expose you to chemicals listed on proposition 65 known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defect or other reproductive harm Wash hands after handling D36 P5_B1_En SC 37 only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 t
250. ons on page 76 4 Neural Surround can be selected for 2 channel signals for which the input signal is PCM 48 kHz or less Dolby Digital DTS or analog 2 channel sources 5 XM HD Surround can be selected only with the XM input 6 ULTRAZ2 for the SC 37 SELECT2 for the SC 35 e Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected or not connected Listening to your system Using the Advanced surround effects The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of additional surround sound effects Most Advanced Surround modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks but some modes are also suited for music sources Try different settings with various soundtracks to see which you like 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode 2 Press ADV SURR ADVANCED SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening mode e ACTION Designed for action movies with dynamic soundtracks e DRAMA Designed for movies with lots of dialog e SCI FI Designed for science fiction with lots of special effects MONO FILM Creates surround sound from mono soundtracks ENT SHOW Suitable for musical sources EXPANDED Creates an extra wide stereo field TV SURROUND Provides surround sound for both mono and stereo TV sources ADVANCED GAME Suitable for video games e SPORTS Suitable for sports programs CLASSICAL Gives a large concert hall type sound ROCK POP Creates a live concert sound for
251. ont speakers or as an independent speaker system in another room 1 Select Speaker System from the Manual SP Setup menu See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 114 if you re not already at this screen 2 Select the speaker system setting e Normal SB FH Select for normal home theater use with front height speakers in your main speaker system A setup e Normal SB FW Select for normal home theater use with front wide speakers in your main speaker system A setup e Speaker B Select to use the B speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in another room see Switching the speaker terminals on page 79 Front Bi Amp Select this setting if you re bi amping your front speakers see Bi amping your speakers on page 26 e ZONE 2 Select to use the Surround back B speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone see Using the MULTI ZONE controls on page 79 3 If you selected Normal SB FH Normal SB FW or Speaker B in Step 2 select the placement of the surround speakers In a 7 1 channel surround system with surround speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening position the surround sound of 5 1 channel sources is heard from the side This function mixes the sound of the surround speakers with the surround back speakers so that the surround sound is heard from diagonally to the rear as it should be e ON SIDE Select when the surround speakers i
252. or ZONE 2 is selected at Speaker System It can also be used when Speaker B is selected at Speaker system and SP AB is selected with the SPEAKERS button e When inputting Dolby True HD SC 35 only DTS HD or DTS Express audio signals the Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be used if no surround signals are recorded in the source You can t use the Virtual Front Height mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo Front Stage Surround Advance Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected e The Virtual Front Height mode cannot be used when no surround speaker is connected e When inputting Dolby True HD SC 35 only DTS HD or DTS Express audio signals the Virtual Front Height mode cannot be used if no surround signals are recorded in the source N Setting the Video options There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu The defaults if not stated are listed in bold Q Important e Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu it is unavailable due to the current source setting and status of the receiver e All of the setting items can be set for each input function e Setting items other than V CONV can only be selected when V CONV is set to ON 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press VIDEO PARAMETER 2 Use t to select the setting you want to adjust Dep
253. or the THX Loudness Plus setting 3 Specify whether the SBch processing is AUTO or MANUAL e AUTO When surround back speakers are connected whether or not surround back channel signals are present in the audio signals being input is detected and the appropriate THX surround mode is set e MANUAL The desired THX surround mode can be selected regardless of whether or not surround back channel signals are present in the audio signals being input 4 Specify the distance of your surround back speakers from each other e 0 1 ft Surround back speakers within 1 foot apart e gt 1 4 ft Surround back speakers between 1 and 4 feet apart e 4 ft lt Surround back speakers more than 4 feet apart default Note 5 Specify whether your subwoofer is Ultra2 Select22 certified or not If your subwoofer isn t THX Ultra2 Select2 certified but you still want to switch boundary gain compensation on select YES here but the effect might not work properly 6 Select either ON or OFF for Boundary Gain Compensation setting 7 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu Network Setup menu Setting up the network to listen to Internet radio on this receiver 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use B and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN t
254. ort the Control with HDMI function We do not guarantee that all synchronized operations will work with components of other makes that support the Control with HDMI function Use a High Speed HDMI cable when you want to use the Control with HDMI function The Control with HDMI function may not work properly if a different type of HDMI cable is used For details about concrete operations settings etc refer to also the operating instructions for each component Making Control with HDMI connections You can use synchronized operation for a connected TV and up to five other components Be sure to connect the IV s audio cable to the audio input of this unit When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections if the TV supports the HDMI Audio Return Channel function the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI terminal so there is no need to connect an audio cable In this case set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI see HDMI Setup on page 73 For details see Connecting your TV and playback components on page 29 Q Important When connecting this system or changing connections be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket After completing all connections connect the power cords to the wall socket After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins You cannot carry out any operations during initializa
255. ote control set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER For the SC 35 s remote control press the IRECEIVER button When set the remote control to the receiver operation mode is indicated in these instructions use the respective procedure described above e The listening modes and many features described in this section may not be available depending on the current source settings and status of the receiver Auto playback There are many ways to listen back to sources using this receiver but the simplest most direct listening option is the Auto Surround feature The receiver automatically detects what kind of source you re playing and selects multichannel or stereo playback as necessary 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode 2 While listening to a source press AUTO ALC DIRECT AUTO SURR ALC STREAM DIRECT for auto playback of a source AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before showing the decoding or playback format Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed e Ifthe source is Dolby Digital DTS or Dolby Surround encoded the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display When listening to the FM radio the Neural Surround feature is selected automatically see Using Neural Surround on page 52 for more on this e When listening to the ADAPTER PORT input the SOUND RETRIEVER
256. ou want to control you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 85 e For greater convenience assign the TV connected to the MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV operation selector switch and assign your satellite cable receiver or set top box connected to the TV input Note EO Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 terminal to the TV input button If a single device is connected to both terminals that device should be assigned to both the TV operation selector switch and TV input buttons e Devices may be assigned to the following input function buttons so cD OPTION IER MULTICH ap i co ep Selecting preset codes directly 1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press HOME MENU The remote display shows SETUP MENU 2 Use t to select PRESET RECALL then press ENTER 3 Press the input function button for the component you want to control then press ENTER When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL set the remote control operation selector switch to TV here The remote display shows the component you want to control for example DVD or TV 4 Use f to select the first letter of the brand name of your component then press ENTER This should be the manufacturer s name for example P for Pioneer 5 Use f to select the manufacturer s name from the list then press ENTER 6 Use t
257. ound output from the other speakers Also note that placing it near a wall may result in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could excessively amplify the bass sound If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall place it at an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface This can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations but depending on the shape of the room this could result in standing waves However even if standing waves are generated their influence on the sound quality can be prevented using the Auto MCACC s standing wave control function page 111 Step 5 Default settings with the Auto MCACC Setup auto sound field correction function It is more effective to perform the Full Auto MCACC Setup page 43 and Precision Distance SC 37 only page 110 procedure once the adjustments described above have been completed En Additional information e Tip e The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger than the distance actually measured with a tape measure etc This is because this distance is corrected for electric delay and is not a problem Positional relationship between speakers and monitor Position of front speakers and monitor The front speakers should be as equidistant as possible to the monitor 45 to 60 STN Troubleshooting Position of center speaker and monitor Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker keeping the center speaker as close a
258. our IR receiver for the type of cable necessary for the connection Continue the chain in the same way for as many e f you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR components as you have receiver see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit s sensor below to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack Note 1 Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window e Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility e If using two remote controls at the same time the IR receiver s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel 2 lf you want to control all your components using this receiver s remote control see Setting the remote to control other components on page 84 SC 37 page 97 SC 35 e If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack using a mini plug cable you won t be able to control this unit using the remote sensor En Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger You can connect components in your system Such as a screen or projector to this receiver so that they switch on or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input function However you must specify which input functions switch on the trigger using the he Input Setup menu on page 4
259. oving the microphone redo the Precision Distance adjustment Additional information CH Symptom Remedy The display shows KEY LOCK ON With the receiver in standby press STANDBY ON for about 10 seconds while holding down when you try to make settings SPEAKERS to disable the key lock Most recent settings have been The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting erased e Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off Turn off all the zones before unplugging the power cord The various system settings are Make sure the blue STANDBY ON light has gone out before unplugging not stored Professional Calibration EQ graphical output Symptom Remedy The EQ response displayed in There are cases where the graph does not appear flat even when selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto the graphical output following MCACC Setup due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal calibration does not appear sound entirely flat e Areas of the graph may appear identical before and after when there is little or no adjustment needed e The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements EQ adjustments made using e Despite level adjustments being made the filters used for analysis may not display these the Manual MCACC setup on adjustments in the graphical output However these adjustments are taken into account by the page
260. pacing which will re optimize the surround sound field ASA is used in three modes THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Ultra2 Music and THX Ultra2 Games e THX Ultra2 Select2 Cinema THX Ultra2 Select2 Cinema mode plays 5 1 movies using all 8 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience In this mode ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sounds DTS ES Matrix and 6 1 Discrete and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Ultra2 Select2 Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode otherwise THX Ultra2 Select2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to provide optinum replay e THX Ultra2 Select2 Music For the playback of multi channel music the THX Ultra2 Select2 Music mode should be selected In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5 1 encoded music sources such as DTS Dolby Digital and DVD Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage e THX Ultra2 Select2 Games For the playback of stereo and multi channel game audio the THX Ultra2 Select2 Games mode should be selected In this mode THX ASA processing is appl
261. peaker in half inch increments The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 114 1 Select Fine SP Distance from the Manual MCACC setup menu 2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance as necessary Use to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the target channel From the listening position face the two speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each speaker Try to make the two tones sound as if they are arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of you and between your arm span oO s Q Lot When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up press to confirm and continue to the next channel e For comparison purposes the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select e f you want to go back and adjust a channel simply use to select it 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu Standing Wave e Default setting ON ATT 0 0dB all filters Acoustic standing waves occur when under certain conditions sound waves from your speaker system resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the walls in your listening area This can have a negative effect on the o
262. peutic electronic devices fire smoke detectors automatic door openers other automatic devices e Persons using pacemakers or other medical or therapeutic electronic devices should consult the manufacturer or dealer of their device regarding the potential effects of radio waves from this remote control e Do not use in aircraft hospitals or other locations where the use of radio wave generating devices is prohibited since adverse affects may be caused to flight communications equipment or medical devices Follow all precautions and directives given by medical institutions EO Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 35 En Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 35 Q Important e This section includes explanations for the SC 35 s remote control For instructions for the SC 37 s remote control see Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 on page 83 About the Remote Setup menu The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the number button while pressing R SETUP The different items on the Remote Setup menu are described below For their setting procedures refer to the explanations for the respective items Setting What it does Preset Preset codes can be set for the various input recall functions The remote control codes of a number of other devices including products of other brands are preset in the remote control to allow these devices to be operated See Selecting preset
263. pleted The Advanced MCACC menu cH Copying MCACC preset data If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration EQ see Manual MCACC setup on page 106 we recommend copying your current settings to an unused MCACC preset Instead of just a flat EQ curve this will give you a reference point from which to start 1 Select MCACC Memory Copy from the Data Management setup menu 2 Select the setting you want to copy e All Data Copies all the settings of the selected MCACC preset memory e Level amp Distance Copies only the channel level and speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC preset memory 3 Select the MCACC preset you ll be copying the settings From then specify where you want to copy them To Make sure you don t overwrite an MCACC preset you re currently using this can t be undone 4 Select OK to confirm and copy the settings When MCACC Memory Copy is displayed select YES If NO is selected the memory is not copied Completed shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been copied then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu Clearing MCACC presets If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets stored in memory you can choose to clear the calibration settings of that preset 1 Select MCACC Memory Clear from the Data Management setup menu 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear Make sure you don t clear a
264. pport e f video images do not appear on your TV try adjusting the resolution DeepColor or other setting for your component e While analog video signals are being output over HDMI use a separate connection for audio output e To output signals in DeepColor use an HDMI cable High Speed HDMI Cable to connect this receiver to a component or TV with the DeepColor feature e Try changing the Resolution setting in Setting the Video options on page 78 e Set the HDMI output setting to the connected HDMI OUT terminal in Switching the HDMI output on page 81 e Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP THROUGH e f the component is a DVI device use a separate connection for the audio e f analog video is being output over HDMI please use a separate connection for the audio e Check the audio output settings of the source component e HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized Due to this interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback e Turning on off the device connected to this unit s HDMI OUT terminal during playback or disconnecting connecting the HDMI cable during playback may cause noise or interrupted audio e Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal during scanning for example or the video quality may just be poor with some video game units for example The picture quality may also depend on the settings etc of your
265. ppropriate component 1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on the rear of this receiver Q Important Closet or shelving unit e Note that if you use this feature make sure that you a e a also have at least one set of analog audio video or component component HDMI jacks connected to another component for grounding purposes 1 Decide which component you want to use the remote sensor of 5 o D gt g4 m gt tiite in SPEAKERS Class 2Wiring SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTIC MANUAL AMLOOP FM UNBAL 75 Q lass 2Wiring When you want to control any component in the chain this is the remote sensor at which you ll point the 7 a a corresponding remote control a W Ss E D 2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component lap rae ap rps vee oar Use a cable with a mono mini plug on each end for the connection 0000 wowmeceeeococooooocoocooooocooooocoocoooceccooooccooooccn SELECTABLE J VOIR LE MODE D EMPLOI SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTIO i OUTPUT 5V MANUAL 150 mA MAX SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D EMPLOI CONTROL 2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the IR receiver Please see the manual supplied with y
266. r a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV e The receiver s input switches automatically when the Control with HDMI compatible component is played e The receiver s input switches automatically when the TV s channel is switched e The synchronized amp mode remains in effect even if the receiver s input is switched to a component other than one connected by HDMI The operations below can also be used on Pioneer Control with HDMI compatible TVs e When the receiver s volume is adjusted or the sound is muted the volume status is displayed on the IV s screen e When the OSD language is switched on the TV the receiver s language setting also switches accordingly About connections with a product of a different brand that supports the Control with HDMI function The synchronized operations below can be used when the receiver s Control with HDMI function is connected to a IV of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the Control with HDMI function Depending on the TV however some of the Control with HDMI functions may not work e When the IV s power is set to standby the receiver s power is also set to standby Only when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV e The sound of TV programs or an external input connected to the TV can also be output from the speakers connected to the receiver If the TV
267. r 5 1 6 1 7 1 channel sources As above As above a Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected Additional information cr Preset code list SC 35 only You should have no problem controlling acomponent if you find the manufacturer in this list but please note that there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using There are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code Q Important e We do not guarantee the operations of all the manufacturers and devices listed Operation may not be possible even if a preset code is entered If you can t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 97 example TV _ Category Pioneer 0004 Preset code C ee TV Pioneer 0004 0006 0113 0115 0116 0117 0119 0122 0123 Admiral 0001 0014 Adventura 0012 Aiwa 0002 Akai 0002 0100 Albatron 0097 Alleron 0009 America Action 0104 Amtron 0008 Anam 0104 Anam National 0003 0008 AOC 0004 0005 0006 0100 Apex 0021 0102 0106 Audiovox 0008 0104 Aventura 0103 Axion 0094 Bang amp Olufsen 0111 Belcor 0004 Bell amp Howell 0001 Beng 0064 Bradford 0008 0104 Brillian 0109 Brockwood 0004 Broksonic 0104 Candle 0004
268. r Dolby TrueHD signals Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD e You shouldn t have any problems using this with most SACD discs but if the sound distorts it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0 dB 09 Using other functions En f e The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations e The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV with the receiver s power in the standby mode See About synchronized operations on page 74 g This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio video synchronizing capability lipsync for HDMI If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable set A DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually For more details about the lipsync feature of your display contact the manufacturer directly h Only when listening to 2 channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode i Only when listening to 2 channel sources in Neo 6 MUSIC CINEMA mode j You can t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo Front Stage Surround Advance Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected e You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO or if Front Bi Amp
269. r secondary ZONE 3 sub zone You will also need a separate amplifier if you are not using the MULTI ZONE setup using speaker terminals ZONE 2 on page 38 for your primary sub zone There are two primary sub zone setups possible with this system Choose whichever works best for you MULTI ZONE listening options The following table shows the signals that can be output to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 Sub Zone Input functions available ZONE 2 DVD TV SAT DVR BDR VIDEO HOME MEDIA GALLERY SC 37 only INTERNET RADIO SC 35 only iPod USB XM RADIO CD CD R TAPE TUNER ADAPTER PORT SIRIUS Outputs analog audio composite video and component video ZONE 3 Same as ZONE 2 above Outputs analog audio and composite video Basic MULTI ZONE setup ZONE 2 e Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack both on this receiver You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration Main zone HDMI i T N 12 we i a Sub zone ZONE 2 AUDIO IN 1 For the INTERNET RADIO SC 35 only HOME MEDIA GALLERY SC 37 only XM RADIO SIRIUS and iPod USB inputs it is not possible use the same input in ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 simultaneously 2 COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT can be used to output clear images e The GUI screen is not displayed if only the COMPONENT
270. r setting the receiver operation mode differs for the remote controls included with the SC 37 and SC 35 For the SC 37 s remote control set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER For the SC 35 s remote control press the RECEIVER button When set the remote control to the receiver operation mode is indicated in these instructions use the respective procedure described above Changing the OSD display language OSD Language The language used on the Graphical User Interface screen can be changed e The explanations in these operating instructions are for when English is selected for the GUI screen 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver for example if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO jacks on your TV make sure that the VIDEO input is now selected 2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 3 Select System Setup from the Home Menu 4 Select OSD Language from the System Setup menu 5 Select the desired language 6 Select OK to change the language The setting is completed and the System Setup menu reappears automatically Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC The
271. r subwoofer See also 7HX Audio Setting on page 117 to make the settings that will give you the best sound experience when using the Home THX modes page 60 Some tips for improving sound quality Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound The following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system e The subwoofer can be placed on the floor Ideally the other speakers should be at about ear level when you re listening to them Putting the speakers on the floor except the subwoofer or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended e For the best stereo effect place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m 6ft to 9 ft apart at equal distance from the TV e f you re going to place speakers around your CRT TV use shielded speakers or place the speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV e f you re using a center speaker place the front speakers at a wider angle If not place them at a narrower angle 03 Connecting your equipment En Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen Also make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position The angle depends on the size of the room Use less of an angle for bigger rooms Surround and surround back
272. re is no AUX Input on this receiver so the AUX button cannot be used 5 INPUT SELECT Use to select the input function page 47 6 Character display This display shows information when transmitting control signals The remote screen s display differs when operating the receiver by sending infrared signals from the remote control and when operating it by RF two way communications For details see Remote contro display on page 13 7 TV CONTROL buttons These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV operation selector switch 8 Receiver setting buttons Set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER first to access AUDIO PARAMETER Use to access the Audio options page 76 VIDEO PARAMETER Use to access the Video options page 78 HOME MENU Use to access the Home Menu pages 43 45 73 104 114 and 117 RETURN Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen 9 t e ENTER Use the arrow buttons when setting up your Surround sound system see page 104 and the Audio or Video options page 76 or 78 Controls and displays Cz 10 Receiver Control buttons Set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER first to access STATUS Press to check selected receiver settings page 81 PHASE CTRL Press to switch on off Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control page 63 CH LEVEL Press repeatedly to select a channel then use to adjust the level page 116 THX
273. receiver page 49 Connect the USB memory device and switch on this receiver page 40 This receiver does not support USB hubs page 49 This receiver recognizes the USB memory device Switch off and on again this receiver as a fraud Additional information CH Symptoms A USB memory device is Causes Some formats of USB memory devices including Remedies Check whether the format of your USB memory connected and displayed but FAT 12 NTFS and HFS cannot be played back on device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32 Note that the FAT the audio files stored on the USB memory device cannot be played back Cannot detect USB keyboard Cannot enter correct text using the USB keyboard this receiver The file format cannot be properly played back on this receiver The USB keyboard is routed through a USB hub A PS2 keyboard is routed through a PS2 USB connector Keyboard is not a USB HID Class device Keyboard is not US international layout keyboard Internet radio SC 35 only Symptoms Cannot access the network Connection Error shows in the display Causes The LAN cable is not firmly connected The router is not switched on The network device was switched on when this receiver was already on Cannot listen to Internet radio The firewall settings for components on the stations Connection Error shows in the display network are currently in operation You are currently
274. reproduction If two waveforms are in phase they crest and trough together resulting in increased amplitude clarity and presence of the sound signal If a crest of a wave meets a trough then the sound will be out of phase and an unreliable sound image will be produced e The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in e If your Subwoofer has a phase control switch set it to the plus sign or 0 However the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer e Set the built in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off If this cannot be done on your subwoofer set the cutoff frequency to a higher value e f the speaker distance is not properly set you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect e The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on When MULTI CH IN input is selected When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 76 2 Tocalibrate and analyze the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers either follow the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced MCACC see Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 or s
275. ress cycles through the options as follows e AUTO The receiver selects the first available signal in the following order HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG e ANALOG Selects an analog signal e DIGITAL Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal e HDMI Selects an HDMI signal e PCM For PCM input signals The receiver selects the first available signal in the following order HDMI DIGITAL When set to DIGITAL HDMI or AUTO only selected DIGITAL or HDMI the indicators light according to the signal being decoded see Display on page 16 Better sound using Phase Control This receiver s Phase Control feature uses phase correction measures to make sure your Sound source arrives at the listening position in phase preventing unwanted distortion and or coloring of the sound 2 e This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital PCM 32 kHz to 192 kHz DTS including DTS 96 24 and WMAQ Pro digital signal formats The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are Dolby Digital DTS WMA9 Pro PCM 32 kHz to 192 kHz Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus DTS EXPRESS DTS HD Master Audio and SACD e You may get digital noise when an LD CD DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal To prevent noise make the proper digital connections page 34 and set the signal input to DIGITAL e Some DVD players don t output DTS signals For more details refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player 3 W
276. ress the number button for the receiver Receiver 1 to Receiver 4 you wish to operate For example to operate Receiver 2 press 2 If the LED lights for one second the setting has been successfully completed When the preset code is input the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 35 CH Setting the remote to control other components Most components can be assigned to one of the input function buttons such as DVD or CD using the component s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote However there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using If you can t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 97 e For greater convenience assign the TV connected to the MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV CTRL button and assign your satellite cable receiver or set top box connected to the TV input terminal to the TV input button If a single device is connected to both terminals that device should be assigned to both the TV CTRL and TV input buttons e Devices may be assigned to the following input function butto
277. roadcast is in a format not compatible with this This receiver cannot play audio in formats other stations File Format Error shows in the display The Internet radio settings receiver This receiver s IP address has not been entered screen cannot be displayed on into the browser correctly the computer Internet browser XM radio messages Status messages Check XM Tuner in the XM Mini Tuner Home Dock or the XM Mini Tuner Dock is not connected to this receiver Cause JavaScript is disabled on the Internet browser The browser is not compatible with JavaScript than MP3 or WMA Also even if they are MP3 or WMA formats this receiver may not be able to play back Check the receiver s IP address and enter it correctly on the browser page 117 Enable JavaScript Use an Internet browser that is compatible with JavaScript Action The XM Mini Tuner is not installed or not fully seated Confirm the XM Mini Tuner is fully seated in the dock and check the XM Mini Tuner Home Dock cable is connected to this receiver ED Additional information En Status messages Check Antenna Loading No Signal Off Air CH Unauthorized CH Unavailable Upgrade XM Tuner XM Power Error Cause The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini Tuner Home Dock or the XM antenna cable is damaged The XM Mini Tuner is acquiring audio or program information from the XM satellite signal This message ca
278. rock and or pop music UNPLUGGED Suitable for acoustic music sources EXT STEREO Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source using all of your speakers PHONES SURR When listening through headphones you can still get the effect of overall surround Tip e When an Advanced Surround listening mode is selected the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 76 Listening in stereo When you select STEREO you will hear the source through just the front left and right speakers and possibly your Subwoofer depending on your speaker settings Multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo Note 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode 2 While listening to a source press STEREO for stereo playback Press repeatedly to switch between e STEREO he audio is heard with your sound settings and you can still use the audio options e F S SURR FOCUS See Using Front Stage Surround Advance below for more on this e F S SURR WIDE See Using Front Stage Surround Advance below for more on this e SOUND RETRIEVER AIR Suitable for listening to the sound from a G uetooth wireless technology device Using Front Stage Surround Advance The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to create natural surround sound effects using just the front speakers and the subwoofer 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode 2 While listeni
279. s positioned right beside you e IN REAR Select when the surround speaker is positioned obliquely behind you Note 4 When Setting Change is displayed select Yes If No is selected the setting is not changed You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu Speaker Setting Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration size number of speakers and crossover frequency Itis a good idea to make sure that the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 are correct Note that this setting applies to all MCACC presets and cannot be set independently 1 Select Speaker Setting from the Manual SP Setup menu 2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set then select a speaker size Use to select the size and number of each of the following speakers e Front Select LARGE if your front speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively or if you didn t connect a subwoofer Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the subwoofer e Center Select LARGE if your center speaker reproduces bass frequencies effectively or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect a center speaker choose NO the center channel is sent to the front speakers e FH Select LARGE if your front height speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other
280. s and human aural characteristics e If you re using THX speakers confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz 4 f you are using a Sound Pressure Level SPL meter take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL C weighting slow reading The System Setup and Other Setup menus Cz X Curve Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright when played back in large rooms The X Curve setting acts as a kind of re equalization for home theater listening and restores proper tonal balance of movie soundtracks 1 Select X Curve from the Manual SP Setup menu 2 Choose the X Curve setting you want Use to adjust the setting The X Curve is expressed as a downwards slope in decibels per octave starting at 2 kHz The sound becomes less bright as the slope increases to a maximum of 3 0dB oct Use the following guidelines to set the X Curve according to your room size e f you select OFF the frequency curve will be flat and the X Curve has no effect 3 When you re finished press RETURN THX Audio Setting This menu allows the user to adjust various THX features including Loudness Plus SBch processing SB Speaker Position THX Ultra2 Select2 Subwoofer on off and Boundary Gain Control Please see page 135 for details regarding these THX features 1 Select THX Audio Setting from the Manual SP setup menu 2 Select either ON or OFF f
281. s possible to the screen makes the overall sound more natural For TVs using Braun tubes however when installing the center speaker on the floor adjust its angle of elevation to point it towards the listening position Installation on floor Diagram as seen from the side Monitor lo 000 Jle OO OOO e Ifthe center speaker is not of the shielded type install it away from the TV e When installing the center speaker on top of the monitor place it facing slightly downwards towards the listening position Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions If you think that there is something wrong with this component check the points below Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work Note e f the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions Power Symptom Remedy The power does not turn on e Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet e Try disconnecting from the power outlet then plugging back in SC 37 only e When remote control operation is set to RF two way communications
282. s power is turned off 8 Select the Standby Through setting you want It is possible to transfer signals from an HDMI connected player to the TV when this receiver s power is on standby as long as Control is ON but the amount of energy consumed rises It is however possible to minimize energy consumption when power is set to standby e Normal Regular setting Power up time from standby is short e Eco Conserves energy while standby Power up time is longer than when set to Normal 9 Select the TV Audio setting you want When a TV supporting the HDMI Audio Return Channel function is connected to the receiver the sound of the TV can be input via the HDMI terminal e Normal The TV s sound is input from the Audio input terminals other than HDMI inputs e via HDMI The IV s sound is input via the HDMI terminal This can only be selected when Control is set to ON 10 Select the 12V Trigger setting you want The component connected to the 12V TRIGGER jack can be turned on and off when HDMI OUT is switched HDMI OUT 1 HDMI OUT 2 or OFF can be selected Select OFF when you want the component to switch when the input function is switched 11 When you re finished press HOME MENU Before using synchronization Once you have finished all connections and settings you must 1 Put all components into standby mode 2 Turn the power on for all components with the power for the TV being turned on
283. se this feature to check which preset code is assigned to an input function button 1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press HOME MENU The remote display shows SETUP MENU 2 Use t to select READ PRESET ID then press ENTER The remote display prompts you for the input function button you want to check 3 Press the input function button of the component for which you want to check the preset code then press ENTER The brand name and preset code appears in the display for three seconds Renaming input function names manually You can customize the names that appear on the remote display when you select an input function for example you could change the name of DVR to HDD DVR 1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press HOME MENU The remote display shows SETUP MENU 2 Use f to select RENAME then press ENTER The remote display prompts you for the button of the input function you want to rename 3 Press the input function button you want to rename then press ENTER 4 Use f to select NAME EDIT then press ENTER To reset the button to its original default name select NAME RESET above 5 Edit the name of the input function in the remote control display pressing ENTER when you re finished Use to change the character and to move forward back a position The name can be up to 14 characters Direct function e Default setting ON You can use the direct function feature to con
284. sed for two seconds The remote display shows OK or NO CODE to confirm the button has been erased 5 Repeat step 4 to erase other buttons 6 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds when you re done Resetting the input assignment of one of the input function buttons This procedure resets the input assignment preset at the remote control s input function button restoring the default 1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press HOME MENU The remote display shows SETUP MENU 2 Use t to select KEY RESET then press ENTER The remote display prompts you for the component corresponding to the button setting to be erased 3 Press the input function button for the component whose input assignment you want to reset then press and hold ENTER for a couple of seconds The remote display shows OK when the input assignment of the remote control s input function button is reset Resetting the remote control settings Use this procedure to reset all the remote control s settings to the factory default 1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press HOME MENU The remote display shows SETUP MENU 2 Use t to select ALL RESET then press ENTER ALL RESET flashes in the remote display 3 Press and hold ENTER for about two seconds The remote display shows OK to confirm the remote presets have been erased Note EO Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 Confirming preset codes U
285. ses output at the Precision Distance SC 37 only the test pulses will be more centrally positioned between the speakers than before the adjustment was performed Be careful not to change the distance values at this time The Advanced MCACC menu cH 4 Press RETURN to go back to the MCACC Data Check menu repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings 5 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Home Menu Speaker Setting Use this to display the speaker size and number of speakers See Speaker Setting on page 115 for more on this 1 Select Speaker Setting from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 Select the channel you want to check Use to select the channel The corresponding channel on the layout diagram is highlighted Channel Level Use this to display the level of the various channels See Channel Level on page 116 for more on this 1 Select Channel Level from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 When MCACC is highlighted use to select the MCACC preset you want to check The level of the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed is displayed for channels that are not connected Speaker Distance Use this to display the distance from the different channels to the listening position See Speaker Distance on page 116 for more on this 1 Select Speaker Distance from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 When MCACC is highlighted use to s
286. speakers for instance the tweeter the squawker midrange and the woofer output sound in the high middle and low frequency ranges respectively Though these speakers are designed to flatten the frequency amplitude characteristics across wide ranges there are cases Note where the group delay characteristics are not effectively flattened This phase distortion of the speakers subsequently causes group delay the delay of low frequency sound against high frequency sound during audio signal playback This receiver analyzes the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers by measuring test signals output from the speakers with the supplied microphone therefore flattening the analyzed frequency phase characteristics during audio signal playback the same correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers This correction minimizes group delay between the ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency phase characteristics across all ranges Furthermore the enhanced trequency phase characteristics between channels ensure better surround sound integration for multichannel setting 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode 2 Press PHASE CTRL PHASE CONTROL to select FULLBAND PHASE Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control functions are switched on The FULL BAND and indicator on the front panel lights 1 Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound
287. speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect front height speakers choose NO the front height channel is sent to the front speakers 4 FW Select LARGE if your front wide speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect front wide speakers choose NO the front wide channel is E sent to the front speakers 1 Depending on the positions of the speakers and the sound source in some cases it may not be possible to achieve good results In this case set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR 2 If you re using a THX speaker setup set all soeakers to SMALL 3 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES Also the center Surround surround back front height and front wide speakers can t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL In this case all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer 4 e You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is Normal SB FH e f the surround speakers are set to NO this setting will automatically be set to NO 5 e You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is Normal SB FW e f the surround speakers are set to NO this setting will automatically be set to NO gt The System Setup and Other Setup menus En e Surr Select LARGE if your surround speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively
288. speakers should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm 2 ft to 3 ft higher than your ears and tilted slightly downward Make sure the speakers don t face each other For DVD Audio the speakers should be more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the front and center speakers Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect Connecting the speakers Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive and negative terminal Make sure to match these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves A caution e These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage To prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts e Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the power to cut off as a Safety measure Bare wire connections 1 Twist exposed wire strands together fig A 2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire fig B 3 Tighten terminal ig C fig A fig B fig C 10mm P g in Banana plug connections If you want to use speaker cables terminated with banana plugs screw the speaker terminal fully shut then plug the banana plug into the end of the speaker terminal
289. ss ENTER After pressing ENTER the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the SIRIUS channel i Tip e You can also press MEMORY during reception display to save the information of up to five songs See Using the SIRIUS Menu below to recall this information Listening to channel presets 1 Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel is stored Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G 2 Press to select the channel preset you want e You can also use the number buttons on the remote control to recall the channel preset Note Using the SIRIUS Menu The SIRIUS Menu provides additional SIRIUS Radio features 1 Press TOP MENU 2 Use f to select a menu item then press ENTER Choose from the following menu items e Channel Skip Add Use and ENTER to select channels you would like to remove restore from to the channel guide Parental Lock Use and ENTER to select channels you would like to place under parental lock Channels put under parental lock are not displayed in the Channel Guide but may be accessed by directly inputting their channel number and providing the parental lock password e Antenna Aiming Check the strength of satellite and terrestrial reception e Memory Recall Use to browse your saved song information see Jip above e Password Set Set the parental lock password 3 When you re finished press TOP MENU to return
290. t at Input Setup Settings Symptom Remedy The Auto MCACC Setup e The ambient noise level may be too high Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible see continually shows an error also Problems when using the Auto MCACTC Setup on page 45 If the noise level cannot be kept low enough you will have to set up the surround sound manually page 114 e When using only one surround back speaker connect it to the SURROUND BACK L Single terminals e To use a 5 1 channel speaker set use the surround speakers for the surround channel not the surround back channel e Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone e f Reverse Phase is displayed try the following The speaker s wiring and may be inverted Check the speaker connections Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected If this happens select GO NEXT and continue f the speaker is not pointed to the microphone listening position or when using speakers that affect the phase dipole speakers reflective speakers etc it may not be possible to properly identity the polarity After using the Auto MCACC There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air conditioner motor etc Setup the speaker size setting Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again is incorrect e Depending on a nu
291. t it does Switches on off power in the sub zone INPUT SELECT Use to select the input function in the sub Zone Input function Use to select the input function directly this buttons may not work for some functions in the sub zone MASTER Use to set the listening volume in the sub SC 35 VOL SC 37 MUTE Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted adjusting the volume also restores the sound a You can only use this button when Speaker System is set to ZONE 2 Note Making an audio or a video recording You can make an audio or a video recording from the built in tuner or from an audio or video source connected to the receiver such as a CD player or Tv 4 Keep in mind you can t make a digital recording from an analog source or vice versa So make sure the components you are recording to from are hooked up in the same way see Connecting your equipment on page 20 for more on connections Since the video converter is not available when making recordings from the video OUT jacks make sure to use the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder as you used to connect your video source the one you want to record to this receiver For example you must connect your recorder using Component video if your source has also been connected using Component video 1 Select the source you want to record Use the input function buttons or INPUT SELECT 2 Prepare the source yo
292. t separately H GAIN Adjusts the output from the front Height height speaker when listening in Gain DOLBY PLIIz HEIGHT mode If set to HIGH the sound from the top will be more emphasized V SB When you re not using Surround Virtual back speakers selecting this Surround mode allows you to hear a virtual Back surround back channel through your surround speakers You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information or if the material sounds better in the format for example 5 1 for which it was originally encoded you can have the receiver only apply this effect to 6 1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES V HEIGHT When you re not using front Virtual height speakers selecting this Front mode allows you to hear a virtual Height front height channel through your front speakers Option s 3 to 3 Default 0 OFF ON QO to 10 Defaults Neo 6 MUSIC 3 Neo 6 CINEMA 10 10 to 90 Defaults EXT STEREO 90 Others 50 LOW MID HIGH OFF ON OFF ON a The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON b With the iPod USB HOME MEDIA GALLERY SC 37 only INTERNET RADIO SC 35 only or ADAPTER PORT input function by default S RTRV is set to ON c UP1 to UP4 can be selected only when the front height speaker is connected The presence or absence of effects depends on the listening mode d The initially set AUTO is only available fo
293. tandby 2 INPUT SELECTOR dial Use to select an input function 3 Indicators ADVANCED MCACC Lights when EQ is set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu page 76 PQLS Lights when the PQLS feature is active page 75 HDMI Blinks when connecting an HDMI equipped component lights when the component is connected page 29 iPod iPhone Lights to indicate iPod iPhone is connected page 40 4 Remote sensor Receives the signals from the remote control see Operating range of remote control unit on page 11 5 Character display See Display on page 16 6 MASTER VOLUME dial VIDEO CAMERA MASTER VOLUME 13 14 15 SPEAKERS 7 Front panel controls To access the front panel controls push gently on the lower third portion of the panel with your finger 8 AUDIO PARAMETER Use to access the Audio options page 76 9 VIDEO PARAMETER Use to access the Video options page 78 10 TUNE PRESET ENTER Use the arrow buttons when setting up your Home Menu Use TUNE f to find radio frequencies and use PRESET to find preset stations page 52 Controls and displays Ce 11 TUNER EDIT Use with ENTER to memorize and name stations for recall page 52 12 BAND Switches between AM and FM radio bands page 52 13 Listening mode buttons AUTO SURR ALC STREAM DIRECT Switches between Auto Surround page 59 Auto Level Control Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct mode pa
294. th Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 you can even play back copyrighted audio files on this receiver Connecting your equipment 03 Connecting Optional B uetooth Connecting an XM Radio tuner ADAPTER After purchasing an XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock When the Bluetooth ADAPTER Pioneer Model No AS Both sold separately you will also need to activate the BT100 is connected to this receiver a product equipped AM Radio service to begin receiving broadcasts with B uetooth wireless technology portable cell phone digital music player etc can be used to listen to music wirelessly IN mwan DVRBDR VIDi Bluetooth ADAPTER sold separately e Switch the receiver into standby and connect XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock Bluetooth ADAPTER to the ADAPTER PORT iene e For instructions on playing the B uetooth wireless technology device see Pairing the Bluetooth e For instructions on playing the XM Radio see ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device Listening to XM Radio on page 53 on page 58 Q Important Connecting a SiriusConnect tuner To receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio broadcasts you will e Do not move the receiver with the 5 uetooth need to activate your SiriusConnect tuner ADAPTER connected Doing so could cause damage or faulty contact OUT 1 ADAPTER PORT CONTROL OUTPUT5V AX Connecting an HDMI equipped z gt component to the
295. th the receiver broadcast stations not included on the list of station distributed by vfuner can be registered and played Check the access code required for registration on the receiver use this access code to access the special Pioneer Internet radio site and register the desired broadcast stations in your favorites The address of the special Pioneer Internet radio site is http Awww radio pioneer com 1 Display the Internet Radio list screen To display the Internet Radio list screen perform steps 1 to 3 at Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 65 Note 2 Use f to select Help then press ENTER 3 Use t to select Get access code then press ENTER The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed Make a memo of this address The following can be checked on the Help screen e Get access code The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed e Show Your WebID PW After registering on the special Pioneer Internet radio site the registered ID and password are displayed e Reset Your WebID PW Resets all the information registered on the special Pioneer Internet radio site When reset all the registered broadcast stations are also cleared If you want to listen to the same stations re register after resetting 4 Access the special Pioneer Internet radio site from your computer and perform the registr
296. the receiver s power turns on and the power and HDMI indicators light 1 If a listening mode other than AUTO SURROUND ALC DIRECT PURE DIRECT OPTIMUM SURR SC 37 only or STEREO is selected while the PQLS effect is enabled the POLS effect is disabled e When this receiver is connected by HDMI cable to a Pioneer player that is compatible with the PQLS function via HDMI connection and HDMI reauthentication is performed the HDMI indicator blinks the PQLS effect is enabled and the listening mode is set to AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode other than AUTO SURROUND ALC DIRECT PURE DIRECT OPTIMUM SURR SC 37 on y or STEREO is selected En 09 Using other functions Chapter 9 Using other functions Q Important e The procedure for setting the receiver operation mode differs for the remote controls included with the SC 37 and SC 35 For the SC 37 s remote control set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER For the SC 35 s remote control press the RECEIVER button When set the remote control to the receiver operation mode is indicated in these instructions use the respective procedure described above Setting the Audio options There are anumber of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu The defaults if not stated are listed in bold Q Important e Note that if a setting doesn t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu it is unavailable due to the c
297. the difference in output post filter Freq Q ATT These are the filter parameters where Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q is the bandwidth the higher the Q the narrower the bandwidth or range of the attenuation ATT the amount of reduction to the targeted frequency 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust e Default setting ON 0 0dB all channels bands Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers excluding the subwoofer It works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the original source material providing a flat equalization setting If you re not satisfied with the adjustment provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 104 you can also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency balance that suits your tastes 1 Select EQ Adjust from the Manual MCACC setup menu 2 Select the channel s you want and adjust to your liking Use B to select the channel Use to select the frequency and f to boost or cut the EQ When you re finished go back to the top of the screen and press to return to Ch then use to select the channel e The OVER indicator shows in the display if the frequency adjust
298. the equalization performed by this receiver before calibration e EQ ON You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area with the equalization performed by this receiver after calibration Note that the EQ response may not appear entirely flat due to adjustments necessary for your listening area When the reverb measurement is finished you can select Reverb View to see the results on screen See Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 127 for troubleshooting information Note 4 Ifyou selected Reverb View you can check the reverb characteristics for each channel Press RETURN when you re done The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Full Auto MCACC or Reverb Measurement measurements are conducted 4 Use to select the channel frequency and calibration setting you want to check Use f to go back and forth between the three The reverb characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can be displayed by selecting Calibration Before After Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps 5 If Advanced EQ Setup is selected select the MCACC memory to be stored then enter the desired time setting for calibration and then select START Based on the reverb measurement above you can choose the time period that will be used for the final frequency adjustment and calibration Even though you can make this setting without reverb meas
299. the setting you want to adjust e Full Auto MCACC See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 for a quick and effective automatic Surround setup e Auto MCACC See Automatic MCACC Expert below for a more detailed MCACC setup SC 37 only In addition the Full Band Phase Control function calibrates the frequency phase characteristics of the connected speakers e Manual MCACC Fine tunes your speaker settings and customizes the Acoustic Calibration EQ see Manual MCACTC setup on page 106 e Demo No settings are saved and no errors occur When the speakers are connected to this receiver the test tone is output repeatedly Press RETURN to cancel the test tone Automatic MCACC Expert If your setup requires more detailed settings than those provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 you can customize your setup options below You can calibrate your system differently for up to six different MCACC presets which are useful if you have different listening positions depending on the type of source for example watching movies from a sofa or playing a video game close to the TV Q Important e Make sure the microphone speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup e The screen saver will automatically appear after five minutes of inactivity A caution e The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume THX T
300. the video output 1 Select Flicker Reduction Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the Flicker Reduction setting you want 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu RF Remote Setup SC 37 on y e Default setting OFF The CU RF100 can be used to operate the receiver by RF communications To do so set the RF Remote setting to ON When ON is set here the receiver can be operated even when the receiver is in the standby mode 1 Select RF Remote Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the RF Remote setting you want 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu EXTENSION Setup SC 35 only e Default setting OFF The CU RF100 can be used to operate the receiver by RF communications To do so set the EXTENSION setting to ON When ON is set here the receiver can be operated even when the receiver is in the standby mode 1 Select EXTENSION Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the EXTENSION setting you want 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu Multi Channel Input Setup You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multi channel input Also when the multi channel input is selected as an input function you can display the video images of other input functions In the Multi Channel Input Setup you can assign a video input to the multi channel input 1 Select Multi Ch In Se
301. this product is prohibited without a license from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary Windows Media Windows Media is a multimedia framework for media creation and distribution for Microsoft Windows Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries Use an application licensed by Microsoft Corporation to author distribute or play Windows Media formatted content Using an application unauthorized by Microsoft Corporation is subject to malfunction Windows Media DRM Windows Media DRM is a DRM Digital Rights Management service for the Windows Media platform It is designed to provide secure delivery of audio and or video content over an IP network to a PC or other playback device in such a way that the distributor can control how that content is used The WMDRM protected content can only be played back on a component supporting the WMDRM service Windows Media Player 11 Windows Media Player 12 Windows Media Player is software to deliver music photos and movies from a Microsoft Windows computer to home stereo systems and TVs With this software you can play back files stored on the PC through various devices wherever you like in your home This software can be downloaded from Microsoft s website e Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP or Windows Vista e Windows Media Player 12 for Windows 7 For more information check the official Micros
302. time elapsed may not be correctly displayed 1 Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE 2 Press HMG to select Home Media Gallery as the input function It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the network The following screen appears when the Home Media Gallery is selected as the input function The number next to indicates the number of connected servers Top Menu E1 A V RECEIVER mOn Rhapsody Sirius Neural Music Direct Favorites Recently Played E Setup 1 8 The server without the amp mark cannot be accessed 3 Use f to select the category you want to play back and then press ENTER Select a category from the following list e Internet Radio Internet radio e Rhapsody Rhapsody music broadcast service e Sirius Internet radio that supports Sirius e Neural Music Direct Internet radio that supports Neural Surround e Server Name Server components on the network e Favorites Favorite songs currently being registered e Recently played Internet Radio listening history most recent 20 incidents Note Depending on the selected category the names of folders files and Internet radio stations are displayed 4 Use f to select the folder music files or Internet radio station to play back and then press ENTER Press to scroll up and down the list and select the desired item When you press ENTER playback st
303. timum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 it isn t necessary to make all of these settings A caution e The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup are output at high volume 1 Select Manual SP Setup then press ENTER See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu above if you re not already at this screen 2 Select the setting you want to adjust If you are doing this for the first time you may want to adjust these settings in order e Speaker System Specifies how you are using your surround back speakers page 115 e Speaker Setting Specifies the size and number of speakers you ve connected page 115 e Channel Level Adjusts the overall balance of your speaker system page 116 e Speaker Distance Specifies the distance of your speakers from the listening position page 116 e X Curve Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker system for movie soundtracks page 117 e THX Audio Setting Specifies whether you are using a THX speaker setup page 117 3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen The System Setup and Other Setup menus Cz Speaker system setting e Default setting Normal SB FH There are several ways you can use the speaker terminals with this receiver In addition to a normal home theater setup where they are used for the front height speakers or front wide speakers they can be used for bi amping the fr
304. tion The HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during initialization and you can turn this receiver on once it has stopped blinking To get the most out of this function we recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this receiver While the receiver is equipped with six HDMI inputs BD HDMI 1 to 5 the Control with HDMI function can only be used with up to three DVD or Blu ray disc players or up to three DVD or Blu ray disc recorders The Control with HDMI function can be used with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal but not with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 2 terminal Control with HDMI function HDMI Setup You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as the connected Control with HDMI compatible components in order to make use of the Control with HDMI function For more information see the operating instructions for each component 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press HOME MENU 2 Select System Setup then press ENTER 3 Select Other Setup then press ENTER 4 Select HDMI Setup then press ENTER 5 Select the Control setting you want Choose whether to set this unit s Control with HDMI function ON or OFF You will need to set it to ON to use the Control with HDMI function When using a component that does not support the Control with HDMI function set this to OFF e ON Enabl
305. tion There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver this depends on the HDMI equipped component you are connecting check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information If you aren t receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver from your component please try one of the following configurations when connecting up Configuration A Use component video cables to connect the video output of your HDMI equipped component to the receiver s component video input The receiver can then convert the analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal for transmission to the display For this configuration use the most convenient connection digital is recommended for sending audio to the receiver See the operating instructions for more on audio connections Note e The picture quality will change slightly during conversion USB interface Symptoms Causes The folders tiles stored on a USB memory device are not displayed The folders tiles are currently stored in a region other than the FAT File Allocation Table region The number of levels in a folder is more than 8 Configuration B Connect your HDMI equipped component directly to the display using an HDMI cable Then use the most convenient connection digital is recommended for sending audio to the receiver See the operating instructions for more on audio connections Set the display volume to minimum when usi
306. tist name album name song name genre or composer similar to using your iPod directly 1 Use f to select Music from the iPod top menu 2 Use t to select a category then press ENTER to browse that category e To return to the previous level any time press RETURN 3 Use t J to browse the selected category e g albums e Use amp to move to previous next levels Note 4 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play then press gt to start playback Zi Tip e You can play all of the songs in a particular category by selecting the All item at the top of each category list For example you can play all the songs by a particular artist Basic playback controls This receiver s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on an iPod SC 37 e Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE then press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod USB operation mode SC 35 e Press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod USB operation mode 1 e This system is compatible with the audio and video of the iPod nano iPod fifth generation audio only iPod classic iPod touch and iPhone However some of the functions may be restricted for some models The system is not compatible with the iPod shuffle e Compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod and iPho
307. to the reception display 1 You can reset the Channel presets and memory in Resetting the system on page 82 2 You can reset the Channel Skip Add Parental Lock and Password settings in Resetting the system on page 82 05 Basic playback En Listening to Internet radio stations SC 35 only ij Tip e This section describes how to listen to Internet radio on the SC 35 On the SC 37 Internet radio is operated with Home Media Gallery For details see Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs SC 37 only on page 64 Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service transmitted via the Internet There are a large number of Internet radio stations broadcasting a variety of services from every corner of the world Some are hosted managed and broadcast by private individuals while others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial radio stations or radio networks Whereas terrestrial or OTA over the air radio stations are geographically restricted on the range of radio waves broadcast from a transmitter through the air Internet radio stations are accessible from anywhere in the world as long as there is a connection to the Internet as services are not transmitted through the air but are delivered over the World Wide Web On this receiver you can select Internet radio stations by genre as well as by region Q Important e Before listening to Internet radio you need to program the Internet radio stations you wish to listen
308. to PCM conversion with SACDs PCM Lights during playback of PCM signals MSTR Lights during playback of DIS HD Master Audio signals 4 MULTI ZONE Lights when the MULTI ZONE feature is active page 79 5 FULL BAND SC 37 only Lights when the Full Band Phase Control is switched on page 63 6 Listening mode indicators AUTO SURROUND Lights when the Auto Surround feature is switched on page 59 ALC Lights when the ALC Auto level control mode is selected page 62 Controls and displays Cz STREAM DIRECT Lights when Direct Pure Direct is selected page 62 ADV SURROUND Lights when one of the Advanced Surround modes has been selected page 61 STEREO Lights when stereo listening is switched on page 61 STANDARD Lights when one of the Standard Surround modes is switched on page 59 THX Lights when one of the Home THX modes is selected page 60 7 PHASE CONTROL Lights when the Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control is switched on page 62 and 63 8 Analog signal indicators Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog signal page 80 9 Tuner indicators TUNED Lights when a broadcast is being received STEREO Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode MONO Lights when the mono mode is set using MPX 10 SOUND Lights when any of the Midnight Loudness or tone controls features is selected page 76 Lights when Dialog Enhanceme
309. to which you ve connected your component For example if your DVD player only has an optical output you will need to change the DVD input function s Digital In setting from COAX 1 default to the optical input you ve connected it to The numbering OPT 1 to 3 corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the back of the receiver 6 When you re finished proceed to the settings for other inputs There are optional settings in addition to the assignment of the input jacks e Input Name You can choose to rename the input function for easier identification Select Rename to do so or Default to return to the system default 1 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone listening position or when using speakers that affect the phase dipole speakers reflective speakers etc Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected 2 e Depending on the characteristics of your room sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm 6 inches will end up with different size settings You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 114 e The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position This setting should be accurate taking delay and room characteristics into account and generally does not need to be changed e If Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and view
310. trol one component using the remote control while at the same time using your receiver to playback a different component This could let you for example use the 1 When Selecting preset codes directly on page 84 are set all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared This function is convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons 2 The TV CONTROL name can be changed when the remote control operation selector switch is switched to TV To change the names of the input functions set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE Controlling the rest of your system In case of SC 37 CH remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player When direct function is on any component you select using the input function buttons will be selected by both the receiver and the remote control When you turn direct function off you can operate the remote contro without affecting the receiver 1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION press HOME MENU The remote display shows SETUP MENU 2 Use f to select DIRECT FUNC then press ENTER The remote display prompts you for the button of the input function you want to control 3 Press the input function button for the component you want to control then press ENTER 4 Use f to switch direct function ON or
311. tup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the SW Input Gain setting you want e OdB Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level originally recorded on the source e 10dB Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level increased by 10 dB 3 Select the Video Input setting you want When the multi channel input is selected as an input function you can display the video images of other input functions The video input can be selected from the following DVD TV SAT DVR BDR VIDEO OFF 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu Additional information Chapter 13 Additional information Speaker Setting Guide In order to achieve an even better Surround effect it is important to accurately position the speakers and make their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to finely focus the multi channel sound The three major elements in positioning the speakers are distance angle and orientation the direction in which the speakers are pointing Distance The distance of all the speakers should be equal Angle The speakers should be horizontally symmetrical Orientation The orientation should be horizontally symmetrical In most homes however it is not possible to achieve this environment For the distance on this receiver it is possible to automatically correct the speaker distance electrically to a precision of 1 2 inch using the Full Auto MCACC Setup fu
312. u want to record Tune to the radio station load the CD video DVD etc 3 Select the input signal according to the signal to be recorded Use the remote control s SIGNAL SEL button 4 Prepare the recorder Insert a blank tape MD video etc into the recording device and set the recording levels Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if you are unsure how to do this Most video recorders set the audio recording level automatically check the component s instruction manual if you re unsure 5 Start recording then start playback of the source component Reducing the level of an analog signal The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog signal when it s too strong You can use this if you find that the OVER indicator lights often or you can hear distortion in the sound e Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press A ATT to switch the input attenuator on or off 1 If the receiver is in standby the display is dimmed and ZONE and your selected sub zone s continue to show in the display 2 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at atime Therefore changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast 3 You won t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you ve switched off the MULTI ZONE control first e If you don t plan to use the MULTI ZONE feature
313. udio cables the digital connection is for playback only page 80 e f your HDD DVD recorder BD recorder etc is equipped with an HDMI output terminal we recommend connecting it to the receiver s HDMI IN terminal When doing so also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI see Connecting using HDMI on page 29 En Connecting your equipment 03 Connecting a satellite cable receiver or other set top box Satellite and cable receivers and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so called set top boxes When you set up the receiver you ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set top box to see 7he Input Setup menu on page 45 Select one AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT R ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL VIDEO OUT VIDEO HDMI iN i a a Si i l y Fe p J Eey COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 1 CONTROL OUT VIDEO IN ZONE2 ZONE3 DVD TV SAT UT UT IN IN OOC DVR BDR OUT IN FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK FH FW FRONT CENTER SU OWO SUBWOOFER IBWOOFER 0000 0000 SURROUND BACK SURROUND L Single ro O SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SEE INSTRUCTION JANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D EMPLOI OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX CO CU RF100 AUTION C N SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 60 160 ENTION ATT ENCEINTE DIMPEDANCE DE 69 160
314. uired automatically in synchrony with the receiver each time the remote control s input is switched Proceed to step 7 If you selected MANUAL go to step 4 4 Press the input function button for the component whose receiver input name you want to acquire then press ENTER The receiver s input name is acquired After PLEASE WAIT is displayed the receiver s input name flashes If the name has not been changed at Input Name on the receiver s Input Setup menu page 45 NO CHANGE flashes 5 Press ENTER to enter the input name displayed on the remote control COMPLETE is displayed and the input name is registered 6 To acquire the receiver input names for other input function buttons repeat step 4 to 5 7 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds to exit and store the operation s 1 IfRF MODE ONLY flashes pairing has not been performed properly or RECEIVER may be set to IR MODE at the remote control s IR RF SELECT setting In this case perform pairing then switch RECEIVER to RF MODE at the remote control s IR RF SELECT setting For details see Pairing the RF adapter and remote contro on page 92 and Operating this receiver by RF communications on page 92 2 The HDMI input function button is not supported Setting the remote control operation mode e Default setting ON When the remote control operation mode is turned on and the receiver s input is switched the remote control display and operation mode
315. uncompressed video contents protected by HDCP 1080 24 1080 60 etc e 3D signal transfer e Deep Color signal transfer e x v Color signal transfer e Audio Return Channel e Input of multi channel linear PCM digital audio signals 192 kHz or less for up to 8 channels e Input of the following digital audio formats 4 Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus DTS High bitrate audio Dolby TrueHD DIS HD Master Audio DIS HD High Resolution Audio DVD Audio CD SACD DSD signal Video CD Super VCD e Synchronized operation with components using the Control with HDMI function see Contro with HDMI function on page 72 HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries x v Color and x v Color logo are trademarks of Sony Corporation 1 e An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection HDCP If you choose to connect to a DVI connector you will need a separate adaptor DVI HDMI to do so A DVI connection however does not support audio signals Consult your local audio dealer for more information e If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed but so long as th
316. up menu Note Checking MCACC Data At the procedure of Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 48 the procedure of Automatic MCACC Expert on page 104 or after fine adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on page 106 you can check your calibrated settings using the GUI screen The data can be transferred to a computer using a USB device to check it on the computer s screen as well 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu 2 Select MCACC Data Check from the Home Menu 3 Select the setting you want to check e Speaker Setting Used to check the settings of the speaker systems See Speaker Setting on page 111 for more on this e Channel Level Used to check the output level of the different speakers See Channe Leve on page 111 for more on this e Speaker Distance Used to check the distance to the different speakers See Speaker Distance on page 111 for more on this Standing Wave Used to check the standing wave control filter settings See Standing Wave on page 111 for more on this Acoustic Cal EQ Used to check the calibration values of the listening environment s frequency response See Acoustic Cal EQ on page 111 for more on this Group Delay SC 37
317. urement it is best to use the measurement results as a reference for your time setting For an optimal system calibration based on the direct sound coming from the speakers we recommend using the 30 50ms setting Use to select the setting Use to switch between them Select the setting from the following time periods in milliseconds 0 20ms 10 30ms 20 40ms 30 50ms 40 60ms 50 70ms and 60 80ms This setting will be applied to all channels during calibration When you re finished select START It will take about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set you are given the option to check the settings on screen 1 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 43 or Reverb Measurement operation depending on the standing wave control setting differences may appear on the reverb graph With the Auto MCACC function the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated By contrast the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves If you wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself with the standing waves as such we rec
318. urrent source settings and status of the receiver 1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press AUDIO PARAMETER 2 Use f to select the setting you want to adjust Depending on the current status mode of the receiver certain options may not be able to be selected Check the table below for notes on this 3 Use to set as necessary See the table below for the options available for each setting 4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu Setting What it does Option s MCACC Selects your favorite MCACC M1 MEMORY 1 MCACC preset memory when multiple to preset preset memories are saved When M6 MEMORY 6 an MCACC preset memory has Default been renamed the given name is M41 MEMORY 1 displayed EQ Switches on off the effects of EQ ON Acoustic Pro ge Calibration EQ S WAVE Switches on off the effects of ON Standing Standing Wave Control pF Wave Setting DELAY Sound Delay What it does Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture By adding a bit of delay you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of the video MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective TONE Tone Control BASS TREBLE S RTRV Sound Retriever DNR Digital Noise Reduction DIALOG E Dialog Enhance ment Hi bit32 surround sound of movies at low volumes from music sources at low volumes
319. using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control SC 37 only on page 63 for more on this 1 Select Group Delay from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 When Channel is highlighted use to select the channel you want to check The result of group delay calibration for the selected channel is displayed When measurements have been performed with Full Auto MCACC selected at Advanced MCACC or with ALL or Full Band Phase Ctrl selected when Auto MCACC is selected the graph before group delay calibration is also displayed When After is selected at Calibration the group delay after calibration is displayed Compared to when Before is selected with After there is less difference in the delay between frequency bands and the group delay between the different channels is uniform allowing you to check the full band phase control effect No Data is displayed if the selected group delay has not been measured ED The Advanced MCACC menu En Output MCACC data Before continuing make sure you have completed step 2 in Checking MCACC Data on page 110 The data measured with the Advanced MCACC function is transmitted to the USB device The 3D graphs of the reverb characteristics and group delay characteristics before and after calibration and the MCACC results parameters can be checked on your computer 2 1 Select Output MCACC data from the MCACC Data Check menu When the receiver is ready for transmissio
320. veloped patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home En ED Additional information En correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur On this product when the THX indicator is on THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes e g THX Cinema THX Surround EX e Re Equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theaters using very different professional equipment Re Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment e Timbre Matching The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming In a movie theatre there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you Inahome theatre you use only two speakers located to the side of your head The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers e Adaptive Decorrelation In a movie theatre a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping Surround sound experience but in a home th
321. verall sound especially at certain lower frequencies Depending on speaker placement your listening position and ultimately the shape of your room 1 If you can t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly e For better audibility the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker 2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave and Acoustic Calibration EQ feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu See Setting the Audio options on page 76 for more on this ED The Advanced MCACC menu En it results in an overly resonant boomy sound The Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly resonant sounds in your listening area During playback of a source you can customize the filters used for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC presets 1 Select Standing Wave from the Manual MCACC setup menu 2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave Control e Filter Channel Select the channel to which you will apply the filter s MAIN all except center channel and subwoofer Center or SW subwoofer TRIM on y available when the filter channel above is SW Adjust the subwoofer channel level to compensate for
322. when not using the B speakers D 5 1 channel surround system amp Front Bi amping connection High quality surround e Speaker System setting Front Bi Amp Bi amping connection of the front speakers for high A 9 1 ch surround system connects the left and right sound quality with 5 1 channel surround sound front speakers L R the center speaker C the left and right front height speakers FHL FHR the left and right surround speakers SL SR the left and right surround back speakers SBL SBR and the subwoofer SW This surround system produces a more true to life sound from above Front Bi Amp B 9 1 channel surround system Front wide e Speaker System setting Normal SB FW This plan replaces the left and right front height speakers shown in A with the left and right front wide speakers FWL FWR This surround system produces a true to life sound over a wider area Connecting your equipment 03 E 5 1 channel surround system amp ZONE 2 connection Multi Zone e Speaker System setting ZONE 2 With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5 1 channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2 The selection of input devices is limited Main zone Q Important e The Speaker System setting must be made if you use any of the connections shown above other than A see Speaker system setting on page 115 e Sound does not come through simult
323. y device This receiver s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on B uetooth wireless technology devices SC 37 ny SOURCE cei ca P POLS MEMOR DIREC VSURR PGM x NU SC 35 So O eo The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Pioneer Corporation is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners 1 e Pairing is required when you first use the Bluetooth wireless technology device and B uetooth ADAPTER e To enable Bluetooth communication pairing should be done with both your system and G uetooth wireless technology device 2 The system can display alohanumeric characters only Other characters may not be displayed correctly 3 The passcode may in some cases be referred to as PASSKEY or PIN code 4 When the Bluetooth ADAPTER is not plugged into the ADAPTER PORT NO ADAPTER will be displayed if ADAPTER PORT input is selected 5 e Bluetooth wireless technology device should be compatible with AVRCP profile e Depending on the Bluetooth wireless technology device you use operation may differ from what is shown in the remote control buttons Listening to your system 06 Chapter 6 Listening to your system Q Important e The procedure for setting the receiver operation mode differs for the remote controls included with the SC 37 and SC 35 For the SC 37 s rem
324. y not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table sofa etc 4 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones This may result in incorrect speaker settings ED The Advanced MCACC menu En If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically In this case you don t need to select OK and press ENTER in step 8 e f you see an ERR message or the speaker configuration displayed isn t correct there may bea problem with the speaker connection If selecting RETRY doesn t work turn off the power and check the speaker connections If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply use to select the speaker and to change the setting and continue If Reverse Phase is displayed the speaker s wiring and may be inverted Check the speaker connections f the connections were wrong turn off the power disconnect the power cord then reconnect properly After this perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure again f the connections were right select GO NEXT and continue 8 Make sure OK is selected then press ENTER A progress report is displayed on screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings Again try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening It may take 3 to 7 minutes e If you selected a
325. y the broadcast Using the noise cut mode The two noise cut modes can be used when receiving AM broadcasts Press MPX to select the noise cut mode 1 to 2 Using Neural Surround This feature uses Neural Surround technologies to achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio e While listening to FM radio press AUTO ALC DIRECT for Neural Surround The Neural Surround mode can be selected also with STANDARD Tuning directly to a station 1 SC 37 only Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE 2 Press TUNER to select the tuner 3 Use BAND to change the band FM or AM if necessary 4 Press D ACCESS Direct Access 5 Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station For example to tune to 106 00 FM press 1 0 6 0 0 If you make a mistake halfway through press D ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and start over Saving station presets If you often listen to a particular radio station it s convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time This receiver can memorize up to 63 stations stored in seven banks or classes A to G of 9 stations each 1 Tune to a station you want to memorize See Listening to the radio above for more on this 2 Press T EDIT TUNER EDIT The display shows PRESET MEMORY then a blinking memory class 3 Press CLASS to s

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

    〝日常のお手入れ  RT107e 取扱説明書  Entreprise Info - CAPA Productions horticoles, spécialité Pépinières  Philips RFX2001WM IR/RF home control Universal remote control  Mode d`emploi: porter bébé devant  JVC LT-32A80S 32" HD-Ready LCD TV  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file